Toshiba 6F3B0253 Users Manual

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-6F3B0253-Users-Manual-131794 toshiba-6f3b0253-users-manual-131794 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 301 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

6F3B0253

UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

PROSEC T1- 16S

USER’S MANUAL

−

−−

− Basic Hardware and Function −

−−

−

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

6F3B0253

Important Information

Misuse of this equipment can result in property damage or human injury.

Because controlled system applications vary widely, you should satisfy yourself

as to the acceptability of this equipment for your intended purpose.

In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for either indirect

or consequential damage or injury that may result from the use of this equipment.

No patent liability is assumed by Toshiba Corporation with respect to use of

information, illustrations, circuits, equipment or examples of application in this

publication.

Toshiba Corporation reserves the right to make changes and improvements to this

publication and/or related products at any time without notice. No obligation shall be

incurred other than as noted in this publication.

This publication is copyrighted and contains proprietary material. No part of this book

may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any

means  electrical, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise  without

obtaining prior written permission from Toshiba Corporation.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Publication number: UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031

1st edition April 2001, 2nd edition November 2001

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 1

CE Marking

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) complies with the

requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the

condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual.

The contents of the conformity are shown below.

Application of EMC : 89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC)

Council Directive LVD : 72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC)

Manufacture’s Name : Toshiba Corporation,

Fuchu Operations-Social Infrastructure Systems

Address : 1, Toshiba-Cho

Fuchu-shi

TOKYO 183-8511

Japan

declares, that the product

Product Name : Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Model Number : TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C

TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C

conforms to the following Product Specifications:

EMC

Radiated Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

Mains Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

Radiated Susceptibility : ENV50140

Conducted RFI Susceptibility : ENV50141, IEC100-4-6.

Electrostatic Discharge : IEC1000-4-2

Electrical Fast Transient : IEC1000-4-4

LVD : EN61131-2:1995 3.10 Dielectric Properties

4. Mechanical Requirements

Supplementary information :

(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S.

(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration.

(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions

6F3B0253

2 T1-16S User’s Manual

UL/c-UL Listing

The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) is UL/c-UL listed as

shown below.

UL and c-UL Listing

File Number : E95637

Product Name : Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Product Covered : Main Unit

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C,

TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C

I/O module

TDI116M*S, TDD116M*S, TDO116M*S,

TAD121M*S, TAD131M*S, TDA121M*S, TDA131M*S,

TFR112M*S

Peripherals

TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S

UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations

File Number : E184034

Product Name : Programmable Controller , T1-16S

Product Covered : Main Unit

TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C

Locations Class : Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Important Notice : 1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I,

DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS ONLY.

2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF

COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,

DIVISION 2.

3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT

EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF

OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 3

Safety Precautions

This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1-16S.

Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1-16S. Also, keep this manual and related

manuals so that you can read them anytime while the T1-16S is in operation.

General Information

1. The T1-16S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial

environment. However, the T1-16S is not intended to be used for systems which may

endanger human life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1-16S for a special

application, such as transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space

systems, nuclear controls, submarine systems, etc.

2. The T1-16S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep

safety of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside

the T1-16S.

3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1-16S, it is assumed that the

users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems.

If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to

this product could result.

4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable

Controllers and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any

questions about this manual.

5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the

operations and applications of the T1-16S. You should test completely if you use them

as a part of your application system.

Hazard Classifications

In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety

precautions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert

against unsafe practices.

Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on

the situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual.

!WARNING

!CAUTION

6F3B0253

4 T1-16S User’s Manual

Safety Precautions

Installation:

1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas

environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T1-

16S and related equipment in the environment described in this manual.

2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units

to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions

described in this manual.

3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks, terminal

blocks or battery. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-

16S and related equipment.

4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related

equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into

the T1-16S and related equipment during installation and wiring.

5. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or

odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also

unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair.

Contact Toshiba for repairing.

Wiring:

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style

terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also

close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been

completed.

3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the

ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.

4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply

power of the specified ratings described in the manual.

5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local

regulations on wiring and grounding.

!CAUTION

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 5

Safety Precautions

Operation:

1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1-16S.

Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents.

2. Operate the T1-16S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep

hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock.

3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during

operation, carefully check for safety.

4. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so

may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

5. Do not use any modules of the T1-16S for the purpose other than specified. This

can cause electrical shock or injury.

6. Do not modify the T1-16S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can

cause fire, electrical shock or injury.

7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for

transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously.

Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S.

8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs.

Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact

can cause malfunction or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

!WARNING

!CAUTION

6F3B0253

6 T1-16S User’s Manual

Safety Precautions

Maintenance:

1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires.

Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related

equipment.

2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance

purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down.

3. Touch a grounded metal part to discharge the static electricity on your body before

touching the equipment.

4. Otherwise, charged static electricity on your body can cause malfunction or failure.

5. Do not disassemble the T1-16S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside.

6. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in

normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles.

7. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating

improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed.

Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.

8. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the

specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded.

9. The battery used in T1-16S may present a risk of fire of chemical burn if mistreated.

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100ºC (212ºF), or incinerate.

10. Replace battery with CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire

or explosion.

11. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble

and do not dispose of in fire.

!CAUTION

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 7

Safety Precautions

Safety Label

The safety label as shown on the right is

attached to the power terminal of the

T1-16S.

Remove the mount paper before wiring.

Peel off the label from the mount paper

and stick it near the power terminals

where it can be readily seen.

Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged.

Do not touch terminals

while power on.

CAUTION

Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death.

Do not touch terminals while power on.

Read related manual thoroughly for safety.

Stick this seal on unit or near unit.

Take off this sheet before wiring.

6F3B0253

8 T1-16S User’s Manual

About This Manual

This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller

T1-16S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to

enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment.

This manual introduces the T1-16S, and explains the system configuration,

specifications, installation and wiring for T1-16S’s basic hardware. This manual provides

the information for designing T1-16S user program, such as the internal operation,

memory configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for

maintenance and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual.

The T1-16S’s computer link function and T1-16S’s multi-purpose communication

functions are covered by the separate manual. Read the T1-16S User’s Manual -

Communication Function - for details.

Inside This Manual

This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix.

Section 1 outlines the T1-16S configuration. To fully understand the T1-16S, it is

important to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in

designing external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with

software. Section 8 explains the T1-16S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10

describe the maintenance procedure for the T1-16S, to ensure safe operation and long

service life.

Related Manuals

The following related manuals are available for T1-16S. Besides this manual, read the

following manuals for your better understanding.

T1-16S User’s Manual

- Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual) UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031

- I/O Modules - UM-TS01∗∗∗-E034

- Communication Function - UM-TS01∗∗∗-E033

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual UM-TS03∗∗∗-E025

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual UM-TS03∗∗∗-E045

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 9

About This Manual

Terminology

The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual.

µµ

µsmicrosecond

ASCII American Standard Code For Information Interchange

AWG American Wire Gage

BCC Block Check Code

CCW Counter-Clockwise

CPU Central Processing Unit

CW Clockwise

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

Hhexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string)

I/O Input/Output

LED Light Emitting Diode

LSB Least Significant Bit

ms millisecond

MSB Most Significant Bit

PWM Pulse Width Modulation

RAM Random Access Memory

ROM Read Only Memory

Vac AC voltage

Vdc DC voltage

6F3B0253

10 T1-16S User’s Manual

Contents

Safety Precautions .................................................................................. 3

About This Manual .................................................................................. 8

1. System Configuration .................................................................... 13

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S ................................................................ 14

1.2 Features .............................................................................................. 16

1.3 System configuration .......................................................................... 19

1.4 I/O expansion ...................................................................................... 20

1.5 Components ........................................................................................ 21

1.5.1 Basic unit ......................................................................................... 21

1.5.2 I/O modules ...................................................................................... 25

1.5.3 Options ............................................................................................ 26

1.6 Programmer port function .................................................................. 27

1.7 RS-485 port communication function ................................................. 28

1.8 Real-time data link system ................................................................. 32

1.9 Peripheral tools .................................................................................. 33

2. Specifications .................................................................................. 37

2.1 General specifications ........................................................................ 38

2.2 Functional specifications .................................................................... 40

2.3 I/O specifications ................................................................................ 42

2.4 External dimensions ........................................................................... 46

3. I/O Application Precautions .......................................................... 47

3.1 Application precautions for input signals ............................................ 48

3.2 Application precautions for output signals .......................................... 50

4. Installation and Wiring ................................................................... 53

4.1 Environmental conditions ................................................................... 54

4.2 Installing the unit ................................................................................. 55

4.3 Wiring terminals .................................................................................. 57

4.4 Grounding ........................................................................................... 58

4.5 Power supply wiring ............................................................................ 59

4.6 I/O wiring ............................................................................................ 61

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 11

Contents

5. Operating System Overview ......................................................... 63

5.1 Operation modes ................................................................................ 64

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................ 66

5.3 Scanning ............................................................................................. 69

6. Programming Information ............................................................. 73

6.1 Devices and registers ......................................................................... 74

6.2 Index modification ............................................................................... 86

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar .................................................................... 88

6.4 I/O allocation ....................................................................................... 89

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting.............................................................. 91

6.6 User program configuration ................................................................ 92

6.6.1 Main program .................................................................................. 94

6.6.2 Sub-program #1 .............................................................................. 95

6.6.3 Timer interrupt program .................................................................. 95

6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs ..................................................................... 96

6.6.5 Subroutines .................................................................................... 97

6.7 Programming language ...................................................................... 98

6.8 Program execution sequence ............................................................ 99

6.9 On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 100

6.10 Password protection ........................................................................... 103

7. Instructions ...................................................................................... 105

7.1 List of instructions .............................................................................. 106

7.2 Instruction specifications .................................................................... 116

8. Special I/O Functions .................................................................... 255

8.1 Special I/O function overview ............................................................. 256

8.2 Variable input filter constant .............................................................. 260

8.3 High speed counter ............................................................................ 261

8.3.1 Single phase up-counter ................................................................. 262

8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter ............................................................ 263

8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................ 265

8.4 Interrupt input function ........................................................................ 268

8.5 Analog setting function ....................................................................... 270

8.6 Pulse output function .......................................................................... 271

8.7 PWM output function .......................................................................... 273

9. Maintenance and Checks .............................................................. 275

9.1 Precautions during operation ............................................................. 276

9.2 Daily checks ........................................................................................ 277

9.3 Periodic checks ................................................................................... 278

9.4 Maintenance parts ............................................................................... 279

9.5 Battery ................................................................................................. 280

6F3B0253

12 T1-16S User’s Manual

Contents

10. Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 281

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................ 282

10.1.1 Power supply check ......................................................................... 283

10.1.2 CPU check ....................................................................................... 284

10.1.3 Program check ................................................................................. 284

10.1.4 Input check ....................................................................................... 285

10.1.5 Output check .................................................................................... 286

10.1.6 Environmental problem .................................................................... 287

10.2 Self-diagnostic items .......................................................................... 288

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 293

A.1 List of models and types ..................................................................... 294

A.2 Instruction index ................................................................................. 295

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 13

Section 1

System Configuration

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S, 14

1.2 Features, 16

1.3 System configuration, 19

1.4 I/O expansion, 20

1.5 Components, 21

1.6 Computer link system, 27

1.7 T1-16S Communication function, 28

1.8 Real-time data link system, 32

1.9 Peripheral tools, 33

6F3B0253

14 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.1 Introducing the T1-16S

The T1-16 is compact, block style, high-performance programmable controller with a

range of 16 to 144 input and output points.

The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 16

types.

T1 Series T1 T1-16 T1-MDR16

T1-MAR16

T1-MDR16D

T1-28 T1-MDR28

T1-MAR28

T1-MDR28D

T1-40 T1-MDR40

T1-MAR40

T1-MDR40D

T1S T1-16S T1-MDR16SS

T1-MDR16SC

T1-MDR16SSD

T1-MDR16SCD

T1-40S T1-MDR40S

T1-MAR40S

T1-MDR40SD

I/O points:

The T1 Series are available in five models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40, T1-40S and T1-

16S. Each model has the following I/O points.

T1-16 T1-16S T1-28 T1-40 T1-40S

Input 8 points 14 points 24 points

Output 8 points

(6 relay plus 2 slid-state) 14 points

(12 relay plus

2 slid-state)

16 points

(14 relay plus 2 solid-state)

Expansion No Up to 8 I/O

modules.

Total up to

144 points.

No 2 option cards plus

1 expansion rack or unit.

Total up to 382 points.

The T1-16S can expand its I/O points by connecting I/O modules. Up to eight I/O

modules can be connected. If eight 16-point I/O modules are connected to the T1-

16S, it can control up to 144 points.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 15

1. System Configuration

Memory capacity:

Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps.

Whole the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM.

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S T1-16S

Memory RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up)

Program

capacity 2 k steps 8 k steps

(4 k mode or 8 k mode)

Data capacity Auxiliary relay: 1024 points

Timer: 64 points

Counter: 64 points

Data register: 1024 words

Auxiliary relay: 4096 points

Timer: 256 points

Counter: 256 points

Data register: 4096 words

EEPROM

back-up Program and leading 512

words of Data register Program and the user specified range of

Data register (0 to 2048 words)

Capacitor: 1 hour

or more

RAM back-up

(at 25°C)

(at 77°F)

Capacitor: 6 hours or more Capacitor: 168 hours

or more

Battery: 2 years

or more

Control functions:

In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as

data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its high-

speed counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions

allow its application to a wide scope of control systems.

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S T1-16S

Language Ladder diagram with function block

Number of

instructions Basic: 17 types

Function: 76 types Basic: 21 types

Function: 99 types Basic: 21 types

Function: 97 types

Subroutines 16

(nesting not allowed) 256

(up to 3 levels of nesting)

Execution speed 1.4 µs/contact, 2.3 µs/coil, 4.2 µs/transfer, 6.5 µs/addition

Real-time

clock/calendar No Yes (year, month, day, week, hours,

minutes, seconds)

Communication RS-232C

(programmer port) RS-232C (programmer port),

RS-485 (multi-purpose)

Construction:

The T1-16S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The

T1-16S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-16S has

modular expandability. The T1-16S provides flexibility into the block style controller.

Series compatibility:

Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable

controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2,

T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared.

6F3B0253

16 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.2 Features

I/O module support:

The T1-16S has an interface for connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight modules

can be connected to the T1-16S.

By using the 16 points I/O module, the T1-16S can control up to 144 I/O points.

Built-in high-speed counter:

Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The

acceptable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only)

Built-in analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. This allows operators to

adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver.

High speed processing:

Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations.

The T1-16S is designed to meet these requirements.

• 1.4 µs per contact • 2.3 µs per coil

• 4.2 µs per 16-bit transfer • 6.5 µs per 16-bit addition

The T1-16S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows

immediate operation independent of program scan.

High performance software:

The T1-16S offers 21 basic ladder instructions and 97 function instructions.

Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative

real PID, etc. are standard on the T1-16S. These functions allow the T1-16S to be

applied to the most demanding control applications.

Battery-less operation:

The T1-16S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a

battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM,

providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation.

This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for

changing the battery every few years.

(Optional battery is also available to back-up real-time clock and retentive data)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 17

1. System Configuration

Pulse output / PWM output:

One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be

output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an

analog output. (DC input type only)

Built-in computer link function:

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data

read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator

interface unit, etc.

The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The

none parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using

modems, remote programming/monitoring is available.

Real-time control data link network:

By connecting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M) to the T1 -16S, high-

speed data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC

model (T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-16Ss can be

connected as remote. Each T1-16S can exchange data with the master through 1

word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750

kbps or 250 kbps.

Sampling trace function:

The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user

specified timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the

programmer screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful

for checking the input signals changing.

Password protection:

By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the

security levels required for your application.

Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited

Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited

Level 2: Writing program is prohibited

Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level)

Two points of solid-state output:

Each model of the T1-16S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC

input type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for

frequent switching application.

6F3B0253

18 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

DIN rail mounting:

The T1-16S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail.

The T1-16S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting.

On-line program changes:

When the T1-16S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode)

program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in

EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program

debugging stage.

Real-time clock/calendar function: (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the

week, hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled

operations, data gathering with time stamps, etc. To back-up the real-time

clock/calendar data, use of the optional battery is recommended.

RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one

of the following communication modes can be selected.

•

••

•Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode.

Up to 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode,

MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured.

•

••

•Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be

directly linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and

requires no special programming.

•

••

•Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and

received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial

ASCII device can be directly connected.

•

••

•Inverter connection mode: This mode is specially provided to communicate with

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 series. By using this function, the T1-16S

can control and monitor the connected Inverters.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 19

1. System Configuration

1.3 System configuration

The following figure shows the T1-16S system configuration.

IBM-PC compatible

personal computer

T-PDS

software

Handy programmer

HP911A

T1-16S basic unit

Peripheral tool

I/O modules

Computer link function

MMI/SCADA

system

8 modules max.

T1-16S

RS232C

IBM-PC compatible

personal computer

RS485 (Standard type only)

MMI/SCADA

system Inverter

6F3B0253

20 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.4 I/O expansion

The T1-16S provides I/O expandability by connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight

I/O modules can be connected.

Available I/O modules

DI116M: 16 points DC input

DO116M: 16 points DC output

DD116M: 8 points DC input + 8 points DC output

RO108M: 8 points relay output

AD121M: 1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA)

AD131M: 1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V)

DA121M: 1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA)

DA131M: 1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V)

TC111M: 1 channel thermocouple input (type K, J, E, or ±50mV)

FR112M: TOSLINE-F10 remote station

T1-16S maximum configuration

(1) The 5Vdc power to the I/O modules is supplied from the main unit. The main

unit can supply maximum 1.5A of the 5Vdc power to the I/O modules. Check

the current consumption of each I/O module used. Refer to section 2.1.

(2) The connecting order of the I/O modules is not restricted except TOSLINE-

F10 remote station FR112M. When the FR112M is used, it must be the right

end module.

(3) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, the T1-16S cannot operate

normally.

T1-16S

main unit

Up to 8 I/O modules

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 21

1. System Configuration

1.5 Components

1.5.1 Basic unit

The T1-16S is available in four types as shown in the following table.

Type

Link/ Calendar

Power supply

Input

Output

T1-MDR16SS

(Enhanced model)

Yes

T1-MDR16SC

(Standard model)

100-240 Vac,

50/60 Hz

T1-MDR16SSD

(Enhanced model)

Yes

T1-MDR16SCD

(Standard model)

24 Vdc

8 points - 24 Vdc

6 points - relay,

2 points - transistor

Power supply and

input/output terminals

Link terminals

(Enhanced model only)

Programmer

port cover

Battery holder

cover

Operation status LEDs

I/O status LEDs (Low side)

I/O status LEDs (High side)

Mounting hole

Expantion

connector

6F3B0253

22 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

♦ Behind the programmer port cover

PRG

H/R

V1 V0

Programmer port connector

Analog setting adjusters

(V0 and V1)

Mode control switch

(HALT / RUN)

Battery holder

Battery type: CR2032

(Optional)

A tab for battery eject

Power supply terminals:

Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3.

See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring.

Input terminals:

Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for

details.

Output terminals:

Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for

details.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 23

1. System Configuration

I/O status LEDs:

Indicates the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal. (color: red)

SW54 setting

value

I/O intending for an indication

Note

0 (default)

Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)

I/O module slot 0

I/O module slot 1

I/O module slot 2

I/O module slot 3

I/O module slot 4

I/O module slot 5

I/O module slot 6

I/O module slot 7

TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), Low 1 word

TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), High 1 word

It indicates these at the

time of only RUN

mode.

Others

Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)

Operation status LEDs:

Indicates the operation status of the T1-16S.

FLT

RUN

PWR

Lit

Internal 5 Vdc power is normal.

PWR

(Power) (green)

Not lit

Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal.

Lit

RUN mode (in operation)

Blinking

HOLD mode

RUN (green)

Not lit

HALT mode or ERROR mode

Lit

ERROR mode

Blinking

Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected)

FLT

(Fault) (red)

Not lit

Normal

Mode control switch:

Controls the operation modes of the T1-16S.

H (HALT)

When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1-16S stops

program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT

command from the programmer is disabled.

R (RUN)

When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1-16S starts

program execution. This is the position during normal operation.

In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also

available.

6F3B0253

24 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

Analog setting adjusters:

Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the

V1 value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section

8.5 for details of the analog setting function.

Programmer port connector:

Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also

be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information

about the computer link function.

Expansion connector:

Used to connect the I/O module.

RS-485 port (Enhanced model only):

Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1-16S,

or many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485

interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1-16S’s RS-485 multi-

purpose communication functions.

Mounting holes:

Used to fix the T1-16S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are

provided at two opposite corners.

Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for

installing the unit.

DIN rail bracket:

The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1-16S on a 35 mm DIN

rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 25

1. System Configuration

1.5.2 I/O modules

The T1-16S can connect up to eight I/O modules.

The following 10 types of the I/O modules are available.

For specification details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S

User’s Manual − I/O Modules −“.

Type

Description

Power supply

DI116M

16 points input, 24Vdc – 5mA

DO116M

16 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA

DD116M

8 points input, 24Vdc - 5mA

+ 8 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA

RO108M

8 points relay output, 24Vdc/240Vac - 1A

AD121M

1 channel analog input, 0 to 5V / 0 to 20mA

AD131M

1 channel analog input, ±10V

DA121M

1 channel analog output, 0 to 20mA

DA131M

1 channel analog output, ±10V

TC111M

1 channel thermo-couple input

FR112M

TOSLINE-F10 remote station,

1 word input + 1 word output

Supplied from the

basic unit (5 Vdc)

Expantion connector Expantion connectors

FR112M Other I/O modules

(1) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, T1-16S cannot operate normally.

(2) The TOSLINE-F10 remote station module (FR112M) must be connected at the

right end. Tow or more FR112Ms cannot be used together.

NOTE

6F3B0253

26 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.5.3 Options

The following optional items are available.

Item

Type

Description

Cable for

programming tool

CJ105

For T-PDS, 5 m length

Programmer port

connector

PT16S

For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable

PT15S

Soldering type

Option card I/O

connector

PT15F

Cable side connector for

DI116M, DO116M, or DD116M

Flat cable type

Back-up battery

CR2032

For memory back up. (Available on the market.)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 27

1. System Configuration

1.6 Programmer port function

The interface of the T1-16S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is

used to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the

computer link function.

The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator

interface unit and the T1-16S. The data in the T1-16S can be read and written by

creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol

of the T1-16S is published in “T1-16S User’s Manual − Communication Function −”.

Item

Specifications

Interface

Conforms to RS-232C

Transmission system

Half-duplex

Synchronization

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

Transmission speed

9600 bps (fixed)

Transmission distance

15 m max.

Framing

Start bit:

Data bits:

Parity:

Stop bit:

1 bit

8 bits (fixed)

Odd or none

1 bit (fixed)

Protocol

T-series computer link (ASCII)

Programmer (binary)

Transmission delay option

0 to 300 ms

By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1-16Ss can be connected on an

RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in

this configuration.

T1-16S

Operator Interface Master Computer

RS-232C RS-485 (1 km max.) Max. 32 T1-16Ss

T1-16S

6F3B0253

28 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.7 RS-485 port communication function

The T1-16S enhanced model has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port.

This port can work independent of the programmer port.

By using this communication port, one of the following four communication modes is

available, computer link mode, data link mode, free ASCII mode, and Inverter

connection mode.

For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual −

Communication Function −”.

Item

Computer

link

Free ASCII

Inverter

connection

Data link

Interface

Conforms to RS-458

Transmission system

Half-duplex

Synchronization

Start-stop system (asynchronous)

Transmission code

ASCII/binary

ASCII

Binary

Transmission speed

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or

19200 bps

(fixed)

Transmission

distance

1 km max.

Framing

Start bit: 1 bit

Data bits: 7 or 8 bits

Parity: Odd, even, or none

Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits

Special

Protocol

T-series

computer

link (ASCII),

Programmer

(binary)

User

defined

ASCII

messages

Inverter VF-

A7/G7/S9

binary

protocol

Special

Link configuration

1-to-N

N/A

1-to-N

1-to-1

T1-16S standard model does not have the RS-485 interface.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 29

1. System Configuration

Computer link mode

T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1-16Ss

can be connected to a master computer.

By using this mode, all the T1-16S’s data can be accessed by a master computer.

The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this

configuration.

Master Computer

RS-485 (1 km max.)

T1-16S T1-16S

T1-16S

Max. 32 T1-16Ss

T1-16S

Data link mode

Two PLCs (any combination of T1-16S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together.

This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special

programming. Data registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer.

RS-485 (1 km max.)

Station No. 1

D0000

D0015

D0016

D0031

D0000

D0015

D0016

D0031

Station No. 2

T1S

T1-16S

6F3B0253

30 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

Free ASCII mode

The free ASCII mode is used to connect between the T1-16S and various serial

ASCII devices, such as a micro computer, bar code reader, printer, display, etc.

By using this mode, the T1-16S can work as a communication master. Therefore, the

T1-16S can communicate with other PLCs using the computer link protocol.

• Bar-code reader

• ID system

• Weigh scale

• Power meter

• Printer

• Others

RS-485 (1 km max.)

T1-16S

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 31

1. System Configuration

Free ASCII mode

The T1-16S's Inverter connection mode is a special function to monitor/control the

Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 through the RS-485 line.

Using this mode, the T1-16S can perform the following functions for the Inverters

connected on the RS-485 line without any special communication program.

• Monitoring − Operating frequency and Terminal status

• Control − Run/Stop/Jog, Forward/Reverse, Frequency reference, etc.

• Parameter read/write

• Broadcast command

RS-485 (1 km max.)

VF-A7 VF-S9VF-A7

RS485 adapter

888

VF-S9

888

888 888

T1-16S

VF-S9 VF-S9

888 888

(Max. 64 Inverters)

6F3B0253

32 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

1.8 Real-time data link system

TOSLINE-F10

TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O

distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M), the

T1-16S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10 network. On this network,

the T1-16S sends 1 word data to the master station and receives 1 word data from

the master station.

Item

TOSLINE-F10 system specifications

High speed mode

Long distance mode

Topology

Bus (terminated at both ends)

Transmission distance

(without repeater)

500 m max. (total)

1 km max. (total)

Transmission speed

750 kbps

250 kbps

Scan transmission

capacity

512 points (32 words) max.

Scan cycle

7 ms/32 words

12 ms/32 words

Error checking

CRC check

Typical data link configuration

The figure below shows the typical data link configuration.

NOTE

T2E

(master)

T2E

(remote)

Master

computer

RI/O RI/O T1-16S

TOSLINE-F10

RI/O: remote I/O

Operator interface units

T1-16S T1-16S

(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual − Option Card and I/O

Module −“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112).

(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of

overall TOSLINE-F10 system.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 33

1. System Configuration

1.9 Peripheral tools

The following peripheral tools are available for the T1-16S.

T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS)

The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on

any IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers.

The same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and

program documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S,

T2/T2E/T2N, T3/T3H and S2T.

• User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace,

program block move/copy, etc.

• Group programming − part program development by multiple designers and

merging them into a complete program − enhance the software productivity.

• Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program

debugging.

• Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work

easy.

• Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible.

The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1-16S.

Type Part number Versions available for

T1-16/28/40 T1-40S/T1-16S

T-PDS for Windows TMW33E1SS Ver 1.0 or later *1) Ver 1.2 or later

T-PDS for MS-DOS TMM33I1SS Ver 1.61 or later *1) Ver 2.1 or later

*1) The T1-16S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are

the following functional limitations.

•The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the

T1-16S.

•Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be

edited/monitored. (depending on the version)

NOTE

The connection cable for the T1-16S is different from that for upper T-Series

PLCs. These cables are supplied separately.

Connection cable for T1-16S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length

Connection cable for T2/T3 …. Type: CJ905, 5 m length

6F3B0253

34 T1-16S User’s Manual

1. System Configuration

T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A)

The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1-16S

using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote

locations.

The HP911A has the following features.

• The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable

controllers T1-16S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3.

• Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers.

• Two display modes are available,

- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns

- Zoom: Full device description

• On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking.

• Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light.

There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable

included with.

Type Part number Cable included with Versions available for T1-16S

HP911A THP911A∗S2 m cable for T1-16S Ver 1.1 or later

HP911 THP911∗∗S2 m cable for the upper

T-series PLCs Ver 1.1 or later

The T1-16S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following

functional limitations.

•The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1-

16S.

•Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be

edited/monitored.

NOTE A 2 m connection cable for the T1-16S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the

HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m

length)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 35

1. System Configuration

Program Storage Module (RM102)

The program storage module (RM102) is an

external memory for storing the T1-16S

program. By using the RM102, program saving

from the T1-16S to the RM102, and program

loading from the RM102 to the T1-16S can be

done without need of a programmer.

Because the RM102 has an EEPROM,

maintenance-free program storage and quick

saving/loading are available.

Multi-drop adapter (CU111)

The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port

supports the computer link function.

When two or more T1-16Ss are connected with

a master computer, the multi-drop adapter

(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration)

The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter

specially designed for the T1-16S’s

programmer port.

6F3B0253

36 T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 37

Section 2

Specifications

2.1 General specifications, 38

2.2 Functional specifications, 40

2.3 I/O specifications, 42

2.4 External dimensions, 46

6F3B0253

38 T1-16S User’s Manual

2. Specifications

2.1 General specifications

Item T1-16S

Power supply voltage 100 to 240Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz

Power consumption 45VA or less

Inrush current 50A or less (at 240Vac, cold start)

24Vdc

(24Vdc, ±10%)

0.2A (for external devices and/or for input signals)

AC Power type

Output

rating

(Note) 5Vdc 1.5A (for I/O module)

Power supply voltage 24Vdc (+20/-15%)

Power consumption 18W or less

Inrush current 25A or less (at 24Vdc)

DC Power type

5Vdc output rating (Note) 1.5A (for I/O module)

Retentive power interruption 10ms or less

Insulation resistance 10MΩ or more

(between power terminals and ground terminal)

Withstand voltage 1500Vac - 1 minute

Ambient temperature 0 to 55°C (operation), -20 to 75°C (storage)

Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH, no condensation

Noise immunity 1000Vp-p/1µs, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC

Vibration immunity 9.8m/s2 (1g)

(for 30 minutes per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)

Shock immunity 98m/s2 (10g)

(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)

Approximate weight 500g

(1) 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

(2) The maximum output current of the 5Vdc is 1.5A. However there is the following

restrictions, depending on the conditions.

• When HP911 is used:

→ Redused by 0.2A

• When RS-485 port is used:

→ Reduced by 0.1A

• When 24Vdc service power is used:

→ Refer to the right chart.

NOTE

24Vdc service power

5Vdc

maximum load current

0.2 (A)0.1

1.5

(A)

1.0

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 39

2. Specifications

(3) The 5Vdc current consumption of each I/O modules is described below.

Check that the total 5Vdc current consumption is within the limit.

Model Specifications 5Vdc consumer

current

DI116M 16points, 24Vdc-5mA input. 50mA

DO116M 16points, 24Vdc-100mA output. 50mA

DD116M 8points, 24Vdc-5mA input.

8points, 24Vdc-100mA output. 50mA

RO108M 8 points, 24Vdc/240Vac – 1A relay output 260mA

AD121M 1ch. 12bit analog input.

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V) 260mA

AD131M 1ch. 12bit analog input. (±10V) 260mA

DA121M 1ch. 12bit analog output.

(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V) 350mA

DA131M 1ch. 12bit analog output. (±10V) 240mA

TC111M 1ch. 12bit thermo couple input. 400mA

FR112M TOSLINE-F10 remote station. 100mA

NOTE

6F3B0253

40 T1-16S User’s Manual

2. Specifications

2.2 Functional specifications

Item T1-16S

Control method Stored program, cyclic scan system

Scan system Floating scan or constant scan (10 – 200ms, 10ms units)

I/O update Batch I/O refresh

(direct I/O instruction available at basic unit’s I/O)

Program memory (Note) RAM and EEPROM (no back-up battery required)

Program capacity 8K steps

(4K or 8K mode)

Programming language Ladder diagram with function block

Instructions Basic: 21

Function: 97

Execution speed 1.4µs/contact, 2.3µs/coil,

4.2µs/16-bit transfer, 6.5µs/16-bit addition

1 main program

1 sub-program (initial program)

1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000ms, 5ms units)

4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input)

Program types

256 subroutines (up to 3 levels of nesting)

I/O register 512 points/ 32 words (X/XW, Y/YW)

Auxiliary relay 4096 points/ 256 words (R/RW)

Special relay 1024 points/ 64 words (S/SW)

Timer 256 points (T./T)

64 at 0.01s, 192 at 0.1s

Counter 256 points (C./C)

Data register 4096 words (D)

User data

Index register 3 words (I, J, K)

Capacitor 1 hour (at 25°C)Memory

back-up Battery (option) Max. 2 years.

Min. 6 months. (Note)

(1) The user program stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM

when power is turned on. Therefore, if the program is modified, it is

necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming

tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-written by original

EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

(2) The data of RAM and calendar IC are backed up by built-in capacitor

and optional battery.

(3) When the optional battery is used, replace the battery periodically with

referring to the table below.

Annual average air temperature

Under 30°C (86°F) Over 30°C (86°F)

Over 8 hours 2 years 1 yearOperation

time per day Under 8 hours 1 year 6 months

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 41

2. Specifications

Functional specifications (cont’d)

Item T1-16S

I/O capacity 16 points (basic)

+128 points (I/O modules)

Input 24Vdc input (8 points)I/O type Output Relay (6 points) + transistor (2 points)

I/O terminal block Fixed

Real-time clock

/calendar Yes, ±60 s/month at 25°C

(Enhanced model only)

Special I/O functions

(Note) • High speed counter, 2 single or 1 quadrature

• Interrupt input, 2 points

• Adjustable analog register, 2 points

• Pulse output, CW+CCW or pulse+direction

• PWM output

Communications

interface • 1 port RS-232C (programmer port)

- for Programmer or Computer link connection

• 1 port RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

- Programmer

- Computer link

- Data link

- Free ASCII

• TOSLINE-F10 remote (by I/O module)

Debug support

function • Sampling trace, 8 devices and 3 register - 256 times

• On-line programming

• On-line EEPROM write

(1) High-speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are

available in the DC input types.

(2) High-speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously.

(3) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously.

NOTE

6F3B0253

42 T1-16S User’s Manual

2. Specifications

2.3 I/O specifications

• Input specifications

Item Specifications

Input type DC input, current source/sink

Number of input points 8 points (8 points/common)

Rated input voltage 24Vdc, +10/-15 %

Rated input current 7mA (at 24Vdc)

Min. ON voltage 15Vdc

Max. OFF voltage 5Vdc

ON delay time 0 to 15ms *1

OFF delay time 0 to 15ms *1

Input signal display LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic

side

External connection Removable terminal block, M3

Withstand voltage 1500Vac, 1 minute

(between internal and external circuits)

Internal circuit

LED

*1: User can change the input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input.

The setting range is 0 to 15ms. (Default value = 10ms) Refer to section 8.2.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 43

2. Specifications

• Input signal connections

24Vdc

Service power

24Vdc

NCN

T1-16S

DC IN

−

+2422206

2321

Vin

2725

24Vdc input

C C

The 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.

NOTE

6F3B0253

44 T1-16S User’s Manual

2. Specifications

• Output specifications

SpecificationsItem Relay output Transistor output

Output type Relay contact, normally open Transistor output, current sink

Number of output points 6 points

(6 pts/common) 2 points

(2 points/common)

Rated load voltage 240Vac/24Vdc (max.) 24Vdc

Range of load voltage Max. 264Vac/125Vdc 20.0 - 28.0Vdc

Maximum load current 2A/point (resistive),

4A/common 0.5A/point (resistive)

ON resistance 50mΩ or less

(initial value) −

Voltage drop at ON −0.5V or less

Leakage current at OFF None 0.1mA or less

Minimum load 5Vdc, 10mA

(50mW) −

ON delay time 10ms or less 0.1ms or less

OFF delay time 10ms or less 0.1ms or less

Input signal display LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side

External connection Removable terminal block, M3

Withstand voltage 1500Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)

Internal circuit

Ry 22

Internal circuit

LED

Vin

Internal circuit

LED

*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.

20 million times or more (mechanical)

100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 45

2. Specifications

• Output signal connections

24Vdc

Service power

24Vdc

3 1

4 2

T1-16S

DC OUT

−

+ 24 22 20 6

23 21

Vin

7 5

27 25

C C

RELAY OUT

Transister output

Relay output

PS 240Vac/24Vdc (max.)

6F3B0253

46 T1-16S User’s Manual

2. Specifications

2.4 External dimensions

♦ T1-16S

[mm]

♦ I/O module

[mm]

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 47

Section 3

I/O Application Precautions

3.1 Application precautions for input signals, 48

3.2 Application precautions for output signals, 50

6F3B0253

48 T1-16S User’s Manual

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.1 Application precautions for input signals

(1) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal

The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input

signal:

Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan

Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan

The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals.

(2) Increasing the contact current

The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In

this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current.

input

circuit

I1 I

Bleeder resistor

Wattage V

=−

>×

(3) Connecting transistor output device

An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1-16S’s input circuit is shown

below.

• For NPN open collector • For PNP open collector

input

circuit

input

circuit

!WARNING Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious

accidents.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 49

3. I/O Application Precautions

(4) Countermeasures against leakage current

When a switch with an LED or sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot recognize

that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder resistor

to reduce input impedance.

Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria:

(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage

when the sensor is switched off.

(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on.

sensor is switched on times three.

input

circuit

Bleeder resistor

6F3B0253

50 T1-16S User’s Manual

3. I/O Application Precautions

3.2 Application precautions for output signals

(1) 2 points of solid-state output

The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on

the DC input types.

These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications.

Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are

different.

(2) Switching life of output relays

Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage

and current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life

(electrical cycles) is shown on the table below.

Load

voltage Load

current Expected life

(thousand) Load

voltage Load

current Expected life

(thousand)

AC 110Vac, 2A 340 DC 24Vdc, 2A 280

load COSφ = 1 1A 720 load L/R = 0 ms 1A 600

0.5A 1,600 0.5A 1,300

110Vac, 2A 150 24Vdc, 2A 60

COSφ = 0.7 1A 320 L/R = 15 ms 1A 150

0.5A 700 0.5A 350

220Vac, 2A 220 48Vdc, 1A 200

COSφ = 1 1A 500 L/R = 0 ms 0.5A 420

0.5A 1,100 48Vdc, 0.5A 130

220Vac, 2A 100 L/R = 15 ms 0.2A 420

COSφ = 0.7 1A 210 110Vdc, 0.5A 200

0.5A 460 L/R = 0 ms 0.2A 550

110Vdc, 0.2A 150

L/R = 15 ms 0.1A 350

WARNING

CAUTION

Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the

T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious

accidents

1. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads.

Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.

2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24Vdc power required

for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched

on/off simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off

power to the T1-16S.

3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the

outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 51

3. I/O Application Precautions

(3) Over-current protection

The output circuit of the T1-16S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the

output should be provided by the user.

(4) Output surge protection

Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient

voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused

by this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load.

Surge absorber:

• Flywheel diode (for DC output)

Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply

Forward current: Larger than the load current

• Varistor (for AC output)

The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply

• CR snubber (for DC or AC output)

R: 0.5 to 1Ω per volt coil voltage

C: 0.5 to 1µF per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor)

output

Load

Fuse appropriate to

the common current

output

circuit

Load

Surge absorber

6F3B0253

52 T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 53

Section 4

Installation and Wiring

4.1 Environmental conditions, 54

4.2 Installing the unit, 55

4.3 Wiring terminals, 57

4.4 Grounding, 58

4.5 Power supply wiring, 59

4.6 I/O wiring, 61

6F3B0253

54 T1-16S User’s Manual

4. Installation and Wiring

4.1 Environmental conditions

Do not install the T1-16S in the following locations:

• Where the ambient temperature drops below 0°C or exceeds 55°C.

• Where the relative humidity drops below 20% or exceeds 90%.

• Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes.

• In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance.

• In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance.

• Where there are corrosive or flammable gases.

• In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles.

• In locations exposed to direct sunlight.

Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1-16S will

be installed:

• Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels.

This distance must be at least 200mm.

• If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to

correctly ground the enclosures.

• When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from

the other panels or equipment.

CAUTION

Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive

gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction.

Install and use the T1-16S and related equipment in the environment

described in this section.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 55

4. Installation and Wiring

4.2 Installing the unit

The T1-16S basic unit and the I/O module come equipped with a bracket at the rear

for mounting on a 35mm DIN rail.

Installation precautions:

• Because the T1-16S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure.

• Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of

heat, such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor.

• Do not install the unit within 200mm of high-voltage or high-power cables.

• Allow at least 70mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation.

• For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from

high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a

metal plate or similar separator.

• If high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1-16S,

special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4.

• Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals downside. Do

not install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason.

• Use M4 size screws to mount the T1-16S.

(Recommended torque: 1.47N⋅m = 15Kgf⋅cm)

CAUTION

NOTE

1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause

fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in

accordance with the instructions described in this section.

2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules,

racks or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock

or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.

3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and

related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to

prevent entering them into the T1 and related equipment during

installation and wiring.

Mount the T1-16S on a vertical panel.

All other mounting positions are not

acceptable.

Upward

6F3B0253

56 T1-16S User’s Manual

4. Installation and Wiring

Dimensions for screw mounting:

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 57

4. Installation and Wiring

4.3 Wiring terminals

The terminal screw size of the T1-16S is M3. Use crimp-style terminals of 7mm width

or less useable for M3. The terminal block is not removable (fixed).

For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3.

T1-MDR16SS .... AC power supply model T1-MDR16SSD..DC power supply model

3 1

4 2

MDR16SS

DC OUT

−

+ 24 22 20 6

23 21

Vin

7 5

27 25

C C

RELAY OUT DC IN

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

3 1

4 2

MDR16SSD

DC OUT

NC 24 22 20 6

23 21

Vin

7 5

27 25

C C

RELAY OUT DC IN

RS-485 (Enhanced model only)

TXA RXA RXB

TXB TRM SG TXA RXA RXB

TXB TRM SG

(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire

relaying or branching.

(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (the upper

terminal block), refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual -

Communication Function -.

The applicable wire size is 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) to 1.25mm2 (16 AWG). The table below

shows the recommended wire size.

Type of signal Recommended wire size

Power 1.25mm2 (16 AWG)

Grounding 1.25mm2 (16 AWG)

I/O signals 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) to 0.75mm2 (18 AWG)

CAUTION

1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover

the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the

terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage

to the T1-16S and related equipment.

NOTE

6F3B0253

58 T1-16S User’s Manual

4. Installation and Wiring

4.4 Grounding

The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately

from other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic

equipment with a single-point ground.

Although the T1-16S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions,

grounding is important for safety and reliability.

Check the grounding against the following criteria.

1. The T1-16S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current

is particularly harmful.

2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected.

Ground the T1-16S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point.

3. Do not connect the ground of the T1-16S to that of high-power systems.

4. Do not use a ground that has unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or

ground subject to vibration.

The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1-16S basic unit for

grounding purpose.

In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1-16S, the rack mounting screw is

used for this purpose.

System ground

T1-16S

Mounting panel

• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1-16S and the expansion

rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar.

• 100Ω or less to ground is required.

!CAUTION 1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction.

Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 59

4. Installation and Wiring

4.5 Power supply wiring

Wire the power source to the T1-16S power supply terminals.

Insulation

transformer

Line filter

Power source

T1-16S

• Power conditions:

AC power supply type DC power supply type

Rated voltage 100 to 240Vac, +10/-15% 24Vdc, +20/-15%

Frequency 50/60Hz, ±5% -

Power consumption 45VA or less 18W or less

Retentive power

interruption Continuous operation for less than 10ms

• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable.

• The power cable should be separated from other cables.

!CAUTION 1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or

fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described below.

6F3B0253

60 T1-16S User’s Manual

4. Installation and Wiring

Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below.

• AC power supply type

100 to 240Vac

Grounding

∼

100-240Vac

• DC power supply type

24Vdc

Grounding

24 Vdc

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 61

4. Installation and Wiring

4.6 I/O wiring

• Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O

terminals.

• 0.75mm2 (18 AWG) to 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals.

• Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200mm.

• If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and

I/O signal cables by or unit at least 50mm.

• It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables.

T1-16S 200mm

or more

High-power

cable

Output

signal

Input

signal

!CAUTION 1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.

2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use

crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover

the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the

terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage

to the T1-16S and related equipment.

6F3B0253

62 T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 63

Section 5

Operating System Overview

5.1 Operation modes, 64

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM, 66

5.3 Scanning, 69

6F3B0253

64 T1-16S User’s Manual

5. Operating System Overview

5.1 Operation modes

The T1-16S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and

the ERROR mode. The T1-16S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for

system checking.

RUN: The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode.

In this mode, the T1-16S reads external signals, executes the user program

stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to

the user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1-16S performs scans the

user program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC.

Program changes and EEPROM write are possible while the T1-16S is in

the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9.

HALT: The HALT mode is a programming mode.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are

switched off.

Program loading into the T1-16S is possible only in the HALT mode.

For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only

when the T1 is in the HALT mode.

ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shutdown mode as a result of self-diagnosis.

The T1-16S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by self-

diagnosis. In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are

switched off. The cause of the shutdown can be confirmed by connecting

the programming tool.

To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the

programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again.

HOLD: The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals.

In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output

updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution

while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be

established by setting any data by using the programming tool.

RUN-F: The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking.

This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os.

Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation

even if the registered I/O modules are not actually mounted.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 65

5. Operating System Overview

The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1-16S

and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool.

The mode transition conditions are shown below.

Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.

Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side.

Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from

the programming tool.

Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from

the programming tool.

Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool.

HOLD command is issued from the programming tool.

HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool.

Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool.

(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis.

The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode

control switch is in R (RUN) side.

(Power ON)

RUN

HALT

HOLD

RUN-F

ERROR

NOTE

6F3B0253

66 T1-16S User’s Manual

5. Operating System Overview

5.2 About the built-in EEPROM

The T1-16S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features.

The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be

maintained without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be

stored in the EEPROM.

The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM.

T1-16S

User program Entire program (8 k steps) and System information

User data User specified number of Data register starting with address 0.

It is set by SW55.

D0000 - Dnnnn

(up to 2048 words)

Setting

information SW36 - SW38:

Programmer port settings

SW55:

Number of Data register to be saved in the EEPROM

SW56 - SW57:

RS-485 port settings

Sampling trace setting information

The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM are transferred to the RAM

when power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM

contents. Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents.

Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write

command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-

written by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 67

5. Operating System Overview

EEPROM

User program

(8 k steps)

and System info

User program

(8 k steps)

and System info

Data register

(D0000 to Dnnnn,

user setting)

Data register

(0 to 2048 words,

user setting)

Other dataOther data

RAM

The rest of Data

other registers

Executed when power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read

command is issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible

only in the HALT mode.

Executed when EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool.

It is possible in either HALT or RUN mode. (See Note)

6F3B0253

68 T1-16S User’s Manual

5. Operating System Overview

Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers to be stored in

the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048.

The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data

registers saved in the EEPROM.

SW55 setting

value Range of Data registers saved

in EEPROM Remarks

0 None

1 D0000 only

2 D0000 to D0001

3 D0000 to D0002

2047 D0000 to D2046

2048 D0000 to D2047 Default value

Others D0000 to D2047 Regarded as 2048

When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value of

SW55 and saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value.

The value of SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM.

At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1-16S checks the

value for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to

the Data registers of the RAM.

(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay

attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of

EEPROM Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm

flag (S007) comes ON.

(2) Even in RUN mode, the EEPROM Write command can be executed.

However, in this case, only the user program is written into the

EEPROM. (D register data and setting information are not saved.)

(3) The data in the EEPROM can also be read or written by using the

program instruction (FUN236 XFER instruction).

(4) When the EEPROM writing is executed by the XFER instruction in the

user program, T1-16S does not update the internal EEPROM write

counts. Therefore the EEPROM alarm flag (S007) will not correspond

to this operation. Pay attention to the life limit of the EEPROM.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 69

5. Operating System Overview

5.3 Scanning

The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1-16S

from the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows,

executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle

starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support.

Power ON

Hardware check

Initial load

Self-diagnosis

initialization

Mode

control

initialization

Program check

I/O update

Timer update

User program

execution

Peripheral

support

Power-up

Initialization

(approx. 1 s)

HALT mode

Scan cycle

RUN mode

At the first

scan

At the first

scan

Scan

6F3B0253

70 T1-16S User’s Manual

5. Operating System Overview

Hardware check:

Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the

peripheral LSIs.

Initial load:

Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to

section 5.2)

Initializes registers and devices as shown below.

External input (X/XW) Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

External output (Y/YW) Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Auxiliary device/register

(R/RW) User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices

are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Special device/register

(S/SW) Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0.

Timer device/register

(T./T) User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

cleared to 0.

Counter device/register

(C./C) User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

cleared to 0.

Data register (D) User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are

cleared to 0.

Index register (I, J, K) Cleared to 0.

(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these

registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are

transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the

initialization.

(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by

built-in capacitor and by the optional battery if used. The back-up

period is 1 hours or more at 25 °C. If optional battery (CR2032) is

used, the back-up period is 1 year or more at 25 °C.

The T1-16S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up

initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to

ON. Therefore, check the status of S00F in the user program and

initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON.

(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T,

C and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated

address for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the

separate manual for the programming tool for setting the retentive

registers.

(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program

debugging. For details, refer to section 6.7.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 71

5. Operating System Overview

Self-diagnosis:

Checks the proper operation of the T1-16S itself. If an error has detected and cannot

be recovered by re-tries, the T1-16S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis

items, refer to section 10.2.

Mode control:

Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from

the programming tool.

The scan mode − floating scan or fixed-time scan − is also controlled hear.

The floating scan:

When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time

is shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status.

Program check:

At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is

checked.

I/O update:

Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and

sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output

circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next

I/O update timing.

The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation.

Timer update:

Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing

devices (S040 to S047).

The fixed-time scan:

The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting

range is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time

than the setting time, it works as the floating scan.

Scan timeScan time Scan time

Scan time (50 ms fixed) Scan time (50 ms fixed)

(idling) (idling)

NOTE

6F3B0253

72 T1-16S User’s Manual

5. Operating System Overview

User program execution:

Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction.

This is the essential function of the T1-16S.

In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program

types, such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5.

Peripheral support:

Supports the communications with the programming tool or external devices

connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within

approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixed-

time scan mode.

If the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority mode is selected.

In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is not limited. As

the result, the communication response is improved although the scan time becomes

long at the time.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 73

Section 6

Programming Information

6.1 Devices and registers, 74

6.2 Index modification, 86

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar, 88

6.4 I/O allocation, 89

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting, 91

6.6 User program configuration, 92

6.7 Programming language, 98

6.8 Program execution sequence, 99

6.9 On-line debug support functions, 100

6.10 Password protection, 103

6F3B0253

74 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.1 Devices and registers

The T1-16S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF

information, such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit)

instructions, such as those for data transfer and arithmetic operations.

Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers

are used to store 16-bit data.

Devices are divided into six types:

X External input devices

Y External output devices

R Auxiliary relay devices

S Special devices

T. Timer devices

C. Counter devices

Registers are divided into eight types:

XW External input registers

YW External output registers

RW Auxiliary relay registers

SW Special registers

T Timer registers

C Counter registers

D Data registers

I, J, K Index registers

Device and register numbers

X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X004, for example,

represents the number 4 bit in the XW00 register.

Bit position / Number

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

XW00 1

X004

Thus, "X004 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW00 is 1.

Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 75

6. Programming Information

Addressing devices

A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consist of a register number and bit position

as follows.

X 00 4

Represents bit position 0 to F in the register.

Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding

device.

Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S)

As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as

follows.

T. 12

Corresponding register number. (decimal number)

Represents the type of device. (T. or C.)

Dot (.) is used to identify as device.

Addressing registers

A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows.

XW 01

Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D)

The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number.

I, J, or K

6F3B0253

76 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Available address range

T1-16SDevice/register Symbol

Number of points Address range

External input device X X000 - X31F

External output device Y

Total 512 points

Y020 - Y31F

External input register XW XW00 - XW31

External output register YW

Total 32 words

YW02 - YW31

Auxiliary relay device R 4096 points R000 - R255F

Auxiliary relay register RW 256 words RW000 - RW255

Special device S 1024 points S000 - S63F

Special register SW 64 words SW00 - SW63

Timer device T. 256 points T.000 - T.255

Timer register T 256 words T000 - T255

Counter device C. 256 points C.000 - C.255

Counter register C 256 words C000 - C255

Data register D 4096 words D0000 - D4095

I 1 word I (no address)

J 1 word J (no address)

Index register

K 1 word K (no address)

(1) 1 word = 16 bits

(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to

H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers.

The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter

(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers.

In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data.

(MSB) F -------------0 F ------------ 0 (LSB)

Upper 16bits Lower 16bits

In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘⋅’.

For example, D0101⋅D0100.

D0100D0101

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 77

6. Programming Information

External input devices (X)

These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the

input circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program.

External output devices (Y)

The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external

devices through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program.

External input registers (XW)

These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values, which are received from the input

circuits.

External output registers (YW)

These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values, which are sent to the output

circuits.

Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW)

The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences.

The auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function

instructions. The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is

necessary to move the data to Y/YW.

It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Timer devices and registers (T./T)

The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the

on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers.

0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided.

Time base T1-16S

0.01 s T000 to T063

0.1 s T064 to T255

The timer devices (T.) work as the output of the timer instructions.

It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

6F3B0253

78 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Counter devices and registers (C./C)

The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT)

and the up-down counter (U/D) instructions.

The counter devices (C.) work as the output of the counter instructions.

It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Data registers (D)

Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW)

except that the D registers cannot be used as devices.

A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and

transferred into the RAM at the initial load.

The range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM can be specified by SW55.

See section 5.2.

It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a

power failure. See section 5.3.

Index registers (I, J, and K)

These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register.

For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates

D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2.

D0000 D0100 if I=100

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 79

6. Programming Information

Special devices and registers (S/SW)

The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See

list below.

Device/

S000 0: Initialization 4: HOLD mode

S001 T1/T1S operation mode 1: HALT mode 6: ERROR mode

S002 2: RUN mode

S003 3: RUN-F mode

S004 CPU error (down) ON at error state (related to SW01)

S005 I/O error (down) ON at error state (related to SW02)

S006 Program error (down) ON at error state (related to SW03)

S007 EEPROM alarm (alarm) ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times

S008 Fixed-time scan time-over

(alarm) ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting

time as fixed-time scan

S009 −Reserved

S00A Clock/calendar error

(alarm) ON when clock/calendar data is illegal

S00B −Reserved

S00C −Reserved

S00D TL-F10 error (alarm) ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs

S00E −Reserved

S00F Retentive data invalid

(alarm) ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices

are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore

these devices cannot be used in the user program.

(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode.

These devices can be used in the user program.

NOTE

6F3B0253

80 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Device/

S010 System ROM error (down) ON at error state

S011 System RAM error (down) ON at error state

S012 Program memory error

(down) ON at error state

S013 EEPROM error (down) ON at error state

S014 −Reserved

S015 −Reserved

S016 −Reserved

S017 −Reserved

S018 −Reserved

S019 −Reserved

S01A −Reserved

S01B −Reserved

S01C −Reserved

S01D −Reserved

S01E −Reserved

S01F Watchdog timer error

(down) ON at error state

S020 −Reserved

S021 I/O mismatch (down) ON at error state

S022 −Reserved

S023 −Reserved

S024 −Reserved

S025 −Reserved

S026 −Reserved

S027 −Reserved

S028 −Reserved

S029 −Reserved

S02A −Reserved

S02B −Reserved

S02C −Reserved

S02D −Reserved

S02E −Reserved

S02F −Reserved

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices

are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore

these devices cannot be used in the user program.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 81

6. Programming Information

Device/

S030 Program error ON at error state (related to SW06)

S031 Scan time over (down) ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms

S032 −Reserved

S033 −Reserved

S034 −Reserved

S035 −Reserved

S036 −Reserved

S037 −Reserved

S038 −Reserved

S039 −Reserved

S03A −Reserved

S03B −Reserved

S03C −Reserved

S03D −Reserved

S03E −Reserved

S03F −Reserved

S040 Timing relay 0.1 s OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval)

S041 Timing relay 0.2 s OFF 0.1 s / ON 0.1 s (0.2 s interval)

S042 Timing relay 0.4 s OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval) All OFF at the

S043 Timing relay 0.8 s OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval) beginning of

S044 Timing relay 1.0 s OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval) RUN mode

S045 Timing relay 2.0 s OFF 1.0 s / ON 1.0 s (2.0 s interval)

S046 Timing relay 4.0 s OFF 2.0 s / ON 2.0 s (4.0 s interval)

S047 Timing relay 8.0 s OFF 4.0 s / ON 4.0 s (8.0 s interval)

S048 −Reserved

S049 −Reserved

S04A −Reserved

S04B −Reserved

S04C −Reserved

S04D −Reserved

S04E Always OFF Always OFF

S04F Always ON Always ON

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices

are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore

these devices cannot be used in the user program.

NOTE

6F3B0253

82 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Device/

S050 CF (carry flag) Used for instructions which manipulate carry

S051 ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred

(related to alarm flags of SW06)

S052 −Reserved

S053 −Reserved

S054 −Reserved

S055 −Reserved

S056 −Reserved

S057 −Reserved

S058 −Reserved

S059 −Reserved

S05A −Reserved

S05B −Reserved

S05C −Reserved

S05D −Reserved

S05E −Reserved

S05F −Reserved

S060 Illegal instruction (down) ON when illegal instruction is detected

S061 −Reserved

S062 −Reserved

S063 −Reserved

S064 Boundary error (alarm) ON when illegal address is designated by indirect

addressing (operation continued)

S065 −Reserved

S066 −Reserved

S067 −Reserved

S068 Division error (alarm) ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation

continued)

S069 BCD data error (alarm) ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD

operation instructions (operation continued)

S06A Table operation error

(alarm) ON when table size error has detected in table

operation instructions (operation continued) (T1S only)

S06B Encode error (alarm) ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation

continued)

S06C −Reserved

S06D −Reserved

S06E −Reserved

S06F −Reserved

NOTE (1) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore

these devices cannot be used in the user program.

(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user

program.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 83

6. Programming Information

Device/

SW07 Clock/calendar (Year) Lower 2 digits of the calendar year

(01, 02, ... )

SW08 Clock/calendar (Month) Month (01, 02, ... 12) They are stored in

SW09 Clock/calendar (Day) Day (01, 02, ... 31) the lower 8 bits by

SW10 Clock/calendar (Hour) Hour (00, 01, ... 59) BCD code

SW11 Clock/calendar (Minute) Minute (00, 01, ... 59)

SW12 Clock/calendar (Second) Second (00, 01, ... 59)

SW13 Clock/calendar (Week) Day of the week

(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06)

SW14 −Reserved

SW15 Peripheral support priority Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority

SW16 Mode of special input

functions Used to select the special input functions

SW17 Input filter constant Used to set the input filter constant

SW18 Preset values for high Used to set the preset values for high speed counters

SW19 speed counter

SW20

SW21

SW22 Count values for high Present count values of the high speed counters are

SW23 speed counter stored

SW24 High speed counter control

flags Control flags for the high speed counters

SW25 −Reserved

SW26 Mode of special output

functions Used to select the special output functions

SW27 Special output control flags Control flags for the pulse/PWM output

SW28 Special output frequency

setting Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output

SW29 PWM output duty setting Pulse duty setting for the PWM output

SW30 Analog setting value 1 Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0

SW31 Analog setting value 2 Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1

SW32 −Reserved

SW33 −Reserved

SW34 TL-F10 send data TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master)

SW35 TL-F10 receive data TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master)

SW36 PRG port station address Used to set the programmer port station address

(1 to 32)

SW37 PRG port parity Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none,

1=odd)

SW38 PRG port response delay Used to set the programmer port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices

are read only for user.

(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore

these devices cannot be used in the user program.

NOTE

6F3B0253

84 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Device/

S390 Timer interrupt execution

status ON during execution

S391 I/O interrupt #1 execution

status ON during execution

S392 I/O interrupt #2 execution

status ON during execution

S393 I/O interrupt #3 execution

status ON during execution

S394 I/O interrupt #4 execution

status ON during execution

S395 −Reserved

S396 −Reserved

S397 −Reserved

S398 −Reserved

S399 −Reserved

S39A −Reserved

S39B −Reserved

S39C −Reserved

S39D −Reserved

S39E −Reserved

S39F −Reserved

S400 −Reserved

S401 HOLD device ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also

available)

S402 −Reserved

S403 −Reserved

S404 −Reserved

S405 −Reserved

S406 −Reserved

S407 −Reserved

S408 −Reserved

S409 −Reserved

S40A −Reserved

S40B −Reserved

S40C −Reserved

S40D −Reserved

S40E −Reserved

S40F −Reserved

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 85

6. Programming Information

Device/

SW41 Sub-program #1 execution

status Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is

executed

SW42 −Reserved

SW43 −Reserved

SW44 −Reserved

SW45 −Reserved

SW46 −Reserved

SW47 −Reserved

SW48 −Reserved

SW49 −Reserved

SW50 −Reserved

SW51 −Reserved

SW52 −Reserved

SW53 −Reserved

SW54 Basic unit I/O LED display

mode Used to display the selected I/O module status

(0 = Basic unit, 1 to 8 = I/O module slot 0 to 7,

9 and 10 = TOSLINE-F10)

SW55 Number of EEPROM write

data Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in

the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048)

SW56 RS-485 port operation

mode Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode

(0 = Computer link, 1 = Data link, 2 = Free ASCII,

3 = Inverter connection)

SW57 RS-485 port response

delay Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time

(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)

SW58 RS-485 port Free ASCII

flags Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function

SW59 −Reserved

SW60 −Reserved

SW61 −Reserved

SW62 −Reserved

SW63 −Reserved

(1) For details of SW54, refer to section 1.5.1.

(2) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2.

(3) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication

function manual.

NOTE

6F3B0253

86 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.2 Index modification

When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly

designating the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct

addressing’.

As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination

with the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is

called ‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified

using an index register, this is called ‘index modification’.

Example 1)

[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]

Data transfer instruction

Transfer data of RW10 to D1000

Example 2)

I J

[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]

Data transfer instruction (with index modification)

Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J)

(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200)

There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers

(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3

types of index register.

There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These

are designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc.

[ 00064 MOV I ](substitutes 64 in index register I)

[ D0035 MOV J ](substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J)

[ RW20 + 00030 → K ](substitutes the result of addition in index register K)

(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers.

(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the

combinations J×I and K×J are allowed.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 87

6. Programming Information

The followings are examples of index modifications.

When I = 0, it designates RW10.

When I = 1, it designates RW11.

When I = -1, it designates RW09.

When I = 10, it designates RW20.

When I = -10, it designates RW00.

When J = 0, it designates D0201⋅D0200.

When J = 1, it designates D0202⋅D0201.

When J = 2, it designates D0203⋅D0202.

When J = -1, it designates D0200⋅D0199.

When J = -2, it designates D0199⋅D0198.

Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index

modification. The address range is not checked by the T1-16S.

Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be

used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if

a value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before

the index modification.

!CAUTION

RW10

D0201

⋅

D0200

NOTE

6F3B0253

88 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (Enhanced model only)

The T1-16S enhanced model is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year,

month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second.

These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format

as follows.

SW07 Year 1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, 2002 = H0002 ...

SW08 Month Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012

SW09 Day 1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031

SW10 Hour H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023

SW11 Minute H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059

SW12 Second H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059

SW13 Week Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006

Program example:

In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm.

Clock/calendar back up:

The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1-16S is off by

built-in capacitor and by the optional battery (CR2032) if used. Its buck-up period is as

follows.

Expected value Guarantee value

Environment

temperature Capacitor Battery Capacitor Battery

Under 30 °C (86 °F) 2 hours 2 year 1 hours 1 year

Over 30 °C (86 °F) 1 hours 1 year 30 minutes 6 months

As shown in the table, it is recommended to use the optional battery when the real-

time clock/calendar function is used.

In the T1-16S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by

excess power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the

clock/calendar is used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user

program.

Setting the clock/calendar:

To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the

week data is automatically calculated.

(1) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the

programming tool.

(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program.

(H0018)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 89

6. Programming Information

6.4 I/O allocation

The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW).

The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers

(Y/YW).

The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus

one register number can be assigned for either input or output.

As for the T1-16S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows.

Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007)

T1-16S Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027)

X000 --- X007 Y020---- Y027

Any operations for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1-16S basic unit is

used.

However, if the I/O modules are used with the T1-16S, the I/O allocation operation is

necessary. Refer to the separate manual "T1-16S User's Manual - I/O Modules -".

6F3B0253

90 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Internally, the T1-16S has information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This

I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software,

i.e. register/device.

The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows.

Unit Slot I/O type

0 X+Y 4W

The T1-16S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0 at

unit 0 position when the memory clear is executed for the T1-16S.

When the T1-16S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table

should be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation),

refer to the programming tool manual.

(1) Unit base address setting function is not supported by the T1-16S.

Do not use this function with the T1-16S. It will causes malfunction.

(2) When the TOSLINE-F10 station module FR112M is used, allocate it at

the end of the I/O modules.

NOTE

PU slot must be blank

Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02

and YW03 are assigned internally)

Slots 1 to 7 of unit 0 are not used

(must be blank)

These slots are for I/O modules

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 91

6. Programming Information

6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting

The program capacity of the T1-16S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1-16S’s

program capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1-16S’s memory mode.

That is, the T1-16S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode.

In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program

capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support

functions.

To set the T1-16S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the

System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write

command.

6F3B0253

92 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.6 User program configuration

A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user

program’. The T1-16S has 8 k steps capacity for storing the user program.

A ‘step’ is the minimum unit, which composes an instruction. Number of steps required

for one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1.

The figure below shows the T1-16S’s memory configuration.

RAM

For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2.

System information

Back-up area

by EEPROM

4 k or 8 k steps User program

Data registers

mentioned in

section 5.2

Other registers/

devices

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 93

6. Programming Information

System information

System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The

following contents are included in the system information.

(1) Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type)

(2) User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used)

(3) Passwords

(4) Retentive register area information

(5) T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps

(6) Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval)

(7) Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication

parameters (Enhanced model)

(8) I/O allocation table

(9) Input force table

The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when this

information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these

are over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.

User program

The T1-16S has a capacity of 8 k steps of the user program.

The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram,

and is managed by units called blocks in each program types.

User program configuration Program type internal configuration

(Program types) (Blocks)

Subroutine

I/O interrupt #4

I/O interrupt #3

I/O interrupt #2

I/O interrupt #1

Timer interrupt

Sub-program #1

Block 1

Block N

(N = max. 256)

Block 10

Block 2

Block 1

Main program

6F3B0253

94 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in

section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are

explained in the following sections.

The following 8 program types are supported by the T1-16S.

(1) Main program

(2) Sub-program #1

(3) Timer interrupt program

(4) I/O interrupt program #1

(5) I/O interrupt program #2

(6) I/O interrupt program #3

(7) I/O interrupt program #4

(8) Subroutine

The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program

execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program

becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive.

In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is

the total capacity.

6.6.1 Main program

The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan.

In the above figure,

Mode means the mode control operation

I/O means the I/O update processing

Timer means the timer up date processing

Main program means the main program execution

the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure.

The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction.

Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not

be executed.

Mode Main programTimerI/O I/OMode

1 scan time

Time

Main program

Timer

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 95

6. Programming Information

6.6.2 Sub-program #1

If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first

scan (before main program execution).

Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers.

The sub-program #1 is called the initial program.

The figure below shows the first scan operation.

The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction.

6.6.3 Timer interrupt program

The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user

specified interval, with suspending other operation.

The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)

The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction.

I/O Main program

Main programSub#1Timer I/OMode Timer

RUN mode

transition 1st scan 2nd scan

Time

1 scan1 scan1 scan

Scan

Timer interrupt

1 scan

Timer interrupt

interval

Timer interrupt

interval

Time

6F3B0253

96 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs

The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately

when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation.

The following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S.

(1) I/O interrupt #1

The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count

value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately

with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by

the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3.

(2) I/O interrupt #2

The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to

section 8.3 for details.

(3) I/O interrupt #3

The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the

interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is

activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O

interrupt #3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information,

refer to section 8.4.

(4) I/O interrupt #4

The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section

8.4 for details.

If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including

the timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing

the other interrupt program execution.

If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as

follows.

Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 97

6. Programming Information

6.6.5 Subroutines

In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be

programmed.

The T1-16S supports up to 256 subroutines.

The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types

(main program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines.

One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET

instruction.

It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available

subroutine numbers are 0 to 255.

[ SUBR (000) ]

Subroutine number

The RET instruction has no subroutine number.

The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL

instruction has the subroutine number to be called.

[ CALL N.000 ]

Subroutine number

Main program Subroutine

[ SUBR (000) ]

[ CALL N.000 ]

 [ RET ]

(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one

subroutine in one block is recommended.

(2) From the inside of a subroutine, other subroutines can be called

(nesting). Its allowable level is up to 3 levels.

NOTE

Execution

flow

6F3B0253

98 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.7 Programming language

The programming language of the T1-16S is ‘ladder diagram’.

Ladder diagram is a language, which composes program using relay symbols as a

base in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to

achieve an efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations

of relay symbols and function blocks are used.

The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as

one network which is connected each other.

The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and

cannot be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs.

The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines × 12 columns.

A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below.

When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON.

Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less.

Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON.

RungRung number

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 99

6. Programming Information

6.8 Program execution sequence

The instructions execution sequence is shown below.

(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block, which

contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program).

(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block

(or the END instruction).

(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung.

When there is no vertical

connection, they are

executed from left to right.

When there is an OR

connection, the OR logic

portion is executed first.

When there is a branch, they

are executed in the order from

the upper line to the lower line.

A combination of and

above.

The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also

follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as

jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the

specifications of each instruction.

4321

5431

321

76421

6F3B0253

100 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

6.9 On-line debug support functions

The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1-16S for effective

program debugging.

On-line function 4 k mode 8 k mode

Force function Yes Yes

Sampling trace function Yes Yes

Changing timer /counter

preset value Yes Yes

Changing constant operand of

function instruction Yes Yes

Changing device directly Yes Yes

Program changing in edit

mode Yes No

EEPROM write command Yes Yes

Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode.

Force function

Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force.

The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input

device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed

manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the

corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the

external input devices (X).

The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the

program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be

changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool,

regardless of the coil circuit execution status.

On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows.

Forced input

ForcedNormal

X005 x005

Forced coil

ForcedNormal

Y023 Y023

If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force

designation, the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM.

Because the force function is debugging function, release all force

designation before executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch

release command is available when the T1-16S is in HALT mode.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 101

6. Programming Information

Sampling trace function

The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every

specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer

(T-PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register).

The minimum sampling timing is the T1-16S’s scan cycle.

This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting.

T1-16S

Sampling target Devices (up to 8) and

Registers (up to 3)

Sampling capacity 256 times

The collected data is stored in the T1-16S internal buffer.

The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed.

The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger

condition) can be specified by status changing of devices.

For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to

the manual for T-PDS.

T-PDS screen example of device timing chart

(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type.

(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used.

(3) The After times setting is not effective for the T1-16S.

NOTE

6F3B0253

102 T1-16S User’s Manual

6. Programming Information

Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing

The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in on-

line (during RUN) by using the programming tool.

Function instruction constant operand changing

The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN)

by using the programming tool.

Device changing

The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by

using the programming tool.

On-line program changing

When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using

normal edit mode. (rung by rung)

In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the

following instructions.

END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET

The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore,

when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation

before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be

overwritten.

On-line EEPROM write

The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode.

In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM.

During this operation, the T1-16S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the

time limit per scan, the T1-16S’s control operation is not stopped.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 103

6. Programming Information

6.10 Password protection

The T1-16S has the password function to protect the user program and data from

unauthorized operations.

There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be

registered to control the protection levels.

These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered,

changed or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary.

The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual

for the programming tool.

Protection level 4 (disabled functions)

• Writing register/device data

• Writing system information

• I/O allocation

Protection level 3 (disabled functions)

• Reading program

• Program write into EEPROM

Protection level 2 (disabled functions)

• Clear memory

• Writing/loading program

• T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool)

• Setting/changing passwords

Protection level 1 (disabled functions)

• None (all functions are available)

When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1-16S will be started as

protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes

the protection level to 2.

When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password.

Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords.

Strict

NOTE

6F3B0253

104 T1-16S User’s Manual

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 105

Section 7

Instructions

7.1 List of instructions, 106

7.2 Instruction specifications, 116

6F3B0253

106 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

7.1 List of instructions

The T1-16S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 97 types of function

instructions as listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in

detail later.

The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the

following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.)

Basic ladder instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

−NO contact ANO (normally open) contact of

device A. 1 1.4 - 3.3 117

−NC contact A

NC (normally closed) contact

of device A. 1 1.4 - 3.3 118

−Transitional

contact (rising) Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input changes from OFF

to ON. 1 3.0 119

−Transitional

contact (falling) Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input changes from ON

to OFF. 1 3.0 120

−Coil A

Relay coil of device A. 1 2.3 121

−Forced coil A

Forced coil of device A. State

of device A is retained

regardless of the input state. 1 2.3 122

−Inverter I Inverts the input state. 1 1.4 - 3.3 123

−Invert coil A

I Stores the inverse state of

input into device A. 1 2.3 124

−Positive pulse

contact A

P Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input is ON and device A

changes from OFF to ON. 1 125

−Negative pulse

contact A

N Turns ON output for 1 scan

when input is ON and device A

changes from ON to OFF. 1 126

−Positive pulse coil A

P Turns ON device A for 1 scan

when input changes from OFF

to ON. 1 127

−Negative pulse coil A

N Turns ON device A for 1 scan

when input changes from ON

to OFF. 1 128

−ON delay timer −[ A TON B ]−Turns ON output when the

time specified by A has

elapsed after the input came

ON. B is a timer register.

2 12.6 129

−OFF delay timer −[ A TOF B ]−Turns OFF output when the

time specified by A has

elapsed after the input came

OFF. B is a timer register.

2 12.8 130

−Single shot timer −[ A SS B ]−Turns ON output for the time

specified by A when the input

comes ON. B is a timer

2 13.0 131

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 107

7. Instructions

Basic ladder instructions (continued)

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

−Counter C CNT Q

E A B Counts the number of cycles

the count input (C) comes ON

while the enable input (E) is

ON, and turns ON output (Q)

when the count reaches to the

value specified by A. B is a

counter register.

2 22.6 132

−Master control set −−[ MCS ]− 1

−Master control reset −−[ MCR ]−

Turns OFF power rail between

MCS and MCR when MCS

input is OFF. 1

3.75

(in a

pair) 133

−Jump control set −−[ JCS ]− 1

−Jump control reset −−[ JCR ]−

Jumps from JCS to JCR when

JCS input is ON. 1

2.75

(in a

pair) 134

−End −−[ END ]− Indicates end of main program

or sub-program. 1 1.4 135

Data transfer instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

018 Data transfer −[ A MOV B ]−Transfers data of A to B. 3 4.2 136

019 Double-word

data transfer

−[ A+1⋅A DMOV B+1⋅B ]−Transfers double-word data

of A+1⋅A to B+1⋅B. 3 7.2 137

020 Invert transfer −[ A NOT B ]−Transfers bit-inverted data of

A to B. 3 4.6 138

022 Data exchange −[ A XCHG B ]−Exchanges data of A with B. 3 6.5 139

024 Table initialize −[ A TINZ (n) B ]−Transfers data of A to n

registers starting with B. 3 140

025 Table transfer −[ A TMOV (n) B ]−Transfers data of n registers

starting with A to n registers

starting with B. 3 141

026 Table invert

transfer

−[ A TNOT (n) B ]−Transfers bit-inverted data of

n registers starting with A to

n registers starting with B. 3 142

090 Multiplexer −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]−Transfers data from the

table, size n starting with A,

to C.

5 70.6 176

091 Demultiplexer −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]−Transfers data from A to the

table, size n starting with C. 5 71.5 177

6F3B0253

108 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Arithmetic operations

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

027 Addition −[ A + B → C ]−Adds data of A and B, and

stores the result in C. 4 6.5 143

028 Subtraction −[ A - B → C ]−Subtracts data of B from A,

and stores the result in C.4 6.5 144

029 Multiplication −[ A ∗ B → C+1

⋅

C ]−Multiplies data of A and B,

and stores the result in

double-length register C+1⋅C.4 8.8 145

030 Division −[ A / B → C ]−Divides data of A by B, and

stores the quotient in C and

the reminder in C+1. 4 9.7 146

031 Double-word

addition

−[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]−Adds data of A+1⋅A and

B+1⋅B, and stores the result

in C+1⋅C.

4 11.6 147

032 Double-word

subtraction

−[ A+1⋅A D- B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]−Subtracts data of B+1⋅B from

A+1⋅A, and stores the result

in C+1⋅C.

4 11.7 148

035 Addition with

carry

−[ A +C B → C ]−Adds data of A, B and the

carry, and stores the result in

C. The carry flag changes

according to the result.

4 9.7 149

036 Subtraction

with carry

−[ A -C B → C ]−Subtracts data of B and the

carry from A, and stores the

result in C. The carry flag

changes according to the

result.

4 9.7 150

039 Unsigned

multiplication

−[ A U∗ B → C+1

⋅

C ]−Multiplies data of A and B,

and stores the result in

double-length register C+1⋅C.

(Unsigned integer operation)

4 151

040 Unsigned

division

−[ A U/ B → C ]−Divides data of A by B, and

stores the quotient in C and

the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

4 152

041 Unsigned

double/single

division

−[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]−Divides data of A+1⋅A by B,

and stores the quotient in C

and the reminder in C+1.

(Unsigned integer operation)

4 15.3 153

043 Increment −[ +1 A ]−Increments data of A by 1. 2 4.6 154

044 Decrement −[ -1 A ]−Decrements data of A by 1. 2 4.6 155

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 109

7. Instructions

Logical operations

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

048 AND −[ A AND B → C ]−Finds logical AND of A and B,

and stores it in C. 4 5.7 156

050 OR −[ A OR B → C ]−Finds logical OR of A and B,

and stores it in C. 4 5.7 157

052 Exclusive OR −[ A EOR B → C ]−Finds logical exclusive OR of A

and B, and stores it in C. 4 5.7 158

064 Bit test −[ A TEST B ]−Turns ON output if logical AND

of A and B is not 0.3 5.0 163

Shift operations

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

068 1 bit shift right −[ SHR1 A ]−Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right

(LSB direction). The carry flag

changes according to the result.2 6.8 164

069 1 bit shift left −[ SHL1 A ]−Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left

(MSB direction). The carry flag

changes according to the result.2 6.8 165

070 n bit shift right −[ A SHR n → B ]−Shifts data of A n bits to the

right (LSB direction) and stores

the result in B. The carry flag

changes according to the result.

4 10.2 166

071 n bit shift left −[ A SHL n → B ]−Shifts data of A n bits to the left

(MSB direction) and stores the

result in B. The carry flag

changes according to the result.

4 10.2 167

074 Shift register D SR Q

S (n)

E A

When shift input (S) comes ON,

shifts the data of specified shift

stores data input (D) state into

A. This operation is enabled

while enable input (E) is ON.

The carry flag changes

according to the result.

Shift register: n devices starting

with device A.

365.9 -

76.2 168

075 Bi-directional

shift register

D DSR Q

S (n)

L A

When shift input (S) comes ON,

shifts the data of specified shift

right depending on direction

input (L). This operation is

enabled while enable input (E) is

ON. The carry flag changes

according to the result.

Shift register: n devices starting

with device A.

Direction: Left when L is ON,

right when L is OFF

369.0 -

79.3 170

6F3B0253

110 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Rotate operations

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

078 1 bit rotate

right

−[ RTR1 A ]−Rotates data of A 1 bit to the

right (LSB direction). The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

2 6.8 172

079 1 bit rotate left −[ RTL1 A ]−Rotates data of A 1 bit to the

left (MSB direction). The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

2 6.8 173

080 n bit rotate

right

−[ A RTR n → B ]−Rotates data of A n bits to

the right (LSB direction) and

stores the result in B. The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

4 10.2 174

081 n bit rotate left −[ A RTL n → B ]−Rotates data of A n bits to

the left (MSB direction) and

stores the result in B. The

carry flag changes according

to the result.

4 10.2 175

Compare instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

096 Greater than −[ A > B ]−Turns ON output if A > B.3 6.1 178

097 Greater than or

equal

−[ A >= B ]−Turns ON output if A ≥ B.3 5.3 179

098 Equal −[ A = B ]−Turns ON output if A = B.3 5.0 180

099 Not equal −[ A <> B ]−Turns ON output if A ≠ B.3 5.0 181

100 Less than −[ A < B ]−Turns ON output if A < B.3 6.1 182

101 Less than or

equal

−[ A <= B ]−Turns ON output if A ≤ B.3 5.3 183

102 Double-word

greater than

−[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B.3 6.1 184

103 Double-word

greater than or

equal

−[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B.3 5.3 185

104 Double-word

equal

−[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B.3 5.0 186

105 Double-word

not equal

−[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B.3 5.0 187

106 Double-word

less than

−[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B.3 6.1 188

107 Double-word

less than or

equal

−[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]−Turns ON output

if A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B.3 5.3 189

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 111

7. Instructions

Compare instructions (continued)

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

108 Unsigned

greater than

−[ A U> B ]−Turns ON output if A > B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 190

109 Unsigned

greater than or

equal

−[ A U>= B ]−Turns ON output if A ≥ B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 191

110 Unsigned

equal

−[ A U= B ]−Turns ON output if A = B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 192

111 Unsigned

not equal

−[ A U<> B ]−Turns ON output if A ≠ B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 193

112 Unsigned

less than

−[ A U< B ]−Turns ON output if A < B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 194

113 Unsigned

less than or

equal

−[ A U<= B ]−Turns ON output if A ≤ B.

(Unsigned integer compare) 3 195

Special data processing

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

If A is a device:

Sets device A to ON.

114 Device/register

set

−[ SET A ]−

If A is a register:

Stores HFFFF in register A.

2 4.2 196

If A is a device:

Resets device A to OFF.

115 Device/register

reset

−[ RST A ]−

If A is a register:

Stores 0 in register A.

2 4.2 197

118 Set carry −[ SETC ]−Sets the carry flag to ON. 1 4.2 198

119 Reset carry −[ RSTC ]−Resets the carry flag to OFF. 1 4.2 199

120 Encode −[ A ENC (n) B ]−Finds the uppermost ON bit

position in the bit file of size 2n

bits starting with register A, and

stores it in B.

457.0 -

141.4 200

121 Decode −[ A DEC (n) B ]−In the bit file of size 2n bits

starting with register B, sets ON

the bit position indicated by

lower n bits of A, and resets

OFF all other bits.

469.5 -

99.1 201

122 Bit count −[ A BC B ]−Counts the number of ON bits

of A and stores it in B.3 202

147 Flip-flop S F/F Q

R ASets ON device A when set

input (S) is ON, and resets OFF

device A when reset input (R) is

ON.

(Reset takes priority)

2 26.7 215

149 Up-down

counter

U U/D Q

E A

While enable input (E) is ON,

counts up or down the number

of cycles the count input (C)

comes ON, depending on the

up/down select input (U).

Up when U is ON, down when U

is OFF.

2 30.1 216

6F3B0253

112 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Program control instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

128 Subroutine call −[ CALL N. n ]−Calls the subroutine number n.2 203

129 Subroutine

return

−−[ RET ]− Indicates the end of a

subroutine. 1

21.0

(in a

pair) 204

132 FOR −[ FOR n ]−When the input of FOR is ON,

executes the segment from 2 205

133 NEXT −[ NEXT ]−FOR to NEXT the number of

times specified by n.1

22.0

(in a

pair) 206

137 Subroutine

entry

−[ SUBR (n) ]−− Indicates the start of the

subroutine number n.2included

in CALL 207

140 Enable

interrupt

−[ EI ]−Enables execution of interrupt

program. 1 208

141 Disable

interrupt

−[ DI ]−Disables execution of interrupt

program. 1

27.6

(in a

pair) 209

142 Interrupt return −−[ IRET ]− Indicates the end of an interrupt

program. 1 1.4 210

143 Watchdog

timer reset

−[ WDT n ]−Extends the scan time over

detection time. 2 16.1 211

144 Step sequence

initialize

−[ STIZ (n) A ]−Resets OFF the n

devices stating with

A, and sets ON A.359.9 -

65.0 212

145 Step sequence

input

−[ STIN A ]−Turns ON output if

input is ON and A is

ON. 2 27.0 213

146 Step sequence

output

−[ STOT A ]− When input is ON,

resets OFF the

devices of STIN on

the same rung, and

sets ON A.

These

configure

a series

of step

sequence

227.0 -

119.0 214

RAS

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

154 Set calendar −[ A CLND ]−Sets 6 registers data starting

with A into clock/calendar. 2 217

155 Calendar

operation

−[ A CLDS B ]−Calculates difference between

present date & time and past

date & time stored in 6 registers

starting with A, and stores the

result in 6 registers starting with

3 218

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 113

7. Instructions

Functions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

056 Moving

average

−[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]−Calculates the average value

of latest n scan values of A,

and stores the result in C.5 159

061 Digital filter −[ A DFL B → C ]−Filters the value of A by filter

constant specified by B, and

stores the result in C.4 160

156 Pre-derivative

real PID

−[ A PID3 B → C ]−Performs PID control. (pre-

derivative real PID algorithm)

Process value (PV): A

Set value (SV): A+1

PID parameters: B and after

Manipulation value (MV): C

485.0 -

428.0 219

160 Upper limit −[ A UL B → C ]−Upper limits the value of A

by B, and stores the result in

C.4 224

161 Lower limit −[ A LL B → C ]−Lower limits the value of A

by B, and stores the result in

C.4 225

162 Maximum

value

−[ A MAX (n) B ]−Finds the maximum value of

n registers data starting with

A, and stores the value in C

and the pointer in C+1.

4 226

163 Minimum value −[ A MIN (n) B ]−Finds the minimum value of

n registers data starting with

A, and stores the value in C

and the pointer in C+1.

4 227

164 Average value −[ A AVE (n) B ]−Calculates the average value

of n registers data starting

with A, and stores the result

in C.

4 228

165 Function

generator

−[ A FG (n) B → C ]−Finds f(x) for given x=A, and

stores it in C. The function

f(x) is defined by parameters

stored in a table 2×n

registers starting with B.

577.7 -

142.1 229

6F3B0253

114 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Conversion instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Page

062 Hex to ASCII

conversion

−[ A HTOA (n) B ]−Converts the hexadecimal

data of n words stating with

A into ASCII characters, and

stores them in nx2 registers

starting with B.

4 161

063 ASCII to Hex

conversion

−[ A ATOH (n) B ]−Converts the ASCII

characters stored in n

registers stating with A into

hexadecimal data, and stores

them in n/2 registers starting

with B.

4 162

180 Absolute value −[ A ABS B ]−Stores the absolute value of

A in B.3 5.0 231

182 2’s

complement

−[ A NEG B ]−Stores the 2’s complement

value of A in B.3 4.6 232

183 Double-word

2’s

complement

−[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]−Stores the 2’s complement

value of A+1⋅A in B+1⋅B.3 4.6 233

185 7-segment

decode

−[ A 7SEG B ]−Converts lower 4 bits of A

into 7-segment code, and

stores it in B.3 43.9 234

186 ASCII

conversion

−[ A ASC B ]−Converts the alphanumerics

(max. 16 characters) of A

into ASCII codes, and stores

them in registers starting

with B.

3 - 10 29.8 -

49.6 236

188 Binary

conversion

−[ A BIN B ]−Converts the BCD data in A

into binary data, and stores it

in B.3 65.5 237

190 BCD

conversion

−[ A BCD B ]−Converts the binary data in A

into BCD data, and stores it

in B.3 55.6 238

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 115

7. Instructions

Special I/O instructions

FUN

No. Name Expression Function Steps Speed

(µs) Available Page

235 Direct I/O −[ I/O (n) A ]−Performs the immediate

block I/O transfer of n

registers starting with A.320.7 +

21.3 × n√ *1 257

236 Expanded data

transfer

−[ A XFER B → C ]−Writes data into the built-in

EEPROM, or reads data

from the EEPROM. The

transfer source and

destination are indirectly

designated by A and C. The

transfer register size is

designated by B.

54.0

read

7130

16w

write

√259

*1: Direct I/O instruction is effective only for the basic unit inputs/outputs.

*2: The expanded data transfer (XFER) instruction supports some special functions. It

also supports the communication function. The execution speed shown in the

above table is for the EEPROM read/write function. When the Inverter connection

mode is selected, the execution speed of this instruction is typically 150 µs (max.

500 µs).

The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the

execution speed column show the execution time without index

modification.

If index modification is used, approx. 20 µs is added per one indexed

operand.

NOTE

6F3B0253

116 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

7.2 Instruction specifications

The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each

instruction. On each page, the following items are explained.

Expression

Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters.

Function

Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the

Expression box.

Execution condition

Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status.

Operand

Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant

operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (√),

it means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to

2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available.

Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for

each operand.

Example

Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example.

Note

Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 117

7. Instructions

NO contact

Expression

Input Output

Function

NO (normally open) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Regardless of the state of device AOFF

ON When device A is OFF OFF

When device A is ON ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√√√√

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON.

X000

R001

Y022

6F3B0253

118 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

NC contact

Expression

Input Output

Function

NC (normally closed) contact of device A.

When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Regardless of the state of device AOFF

ON When device A is OFF ON

When device A is ON OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√√√√

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF.

X000

R001

Y022

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 119

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Rising edge)

Expression

Input Output

Function

When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Regardless of the input state at last scan OFF

ON When the input state at last scan is OFF ON

When the input state at last scan is ON OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON.

X000

Y022

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total)

• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

120 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Transitional contact (Falling edge)

Expression

Input Output

Function

When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF When the input state at last scan is OFF OFF

When the input state at last scan is ON ON

ON Regardless of the input state at last scan OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF.

X000

Y022

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. ( and total)

• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 121

7. Instructions

( ) Coil

Expression

Input ( )

Function

Relay coil of device A.

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Sets device A to OFF −

ON Sets device A to ON −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

6F3B0253

122 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Forced coil

Expression

Input

Function

Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation −

ON No operation −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state.

X000

Y025

Set force Reset force Set force Reset force

Note

• The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF

by the programming tool.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 123

7. Instructions

I Inverter

Expression

Input I Output

Function

When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned

OFF.

This instruction inverts the link state.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Inverts the input state ON

ON Inverts the input state OFF

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y022

6F3B0253

124 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

( I ) Invert coil

Expression

Input ( I )

Function

When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to

OFF. This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the device A.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Sets device A to ON −

ON Sets device A to OFF −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON.

X000

Y025

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 125

7. Instructions

PPositive pulse contact

Expression

Input P Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at

this scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Regardless of the state of device AOFF

ON State of device A is OFF OFF

State of device A is ON A is OFF at last scan ON

A is ON at last scan OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√√√√

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

126 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

NNegative pulse contact

Expression

Input N Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at

this scan), the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Regardless of the state of device AOFF

ON State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan OFF

A is ON at last scan ON

State of device A is ON OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√√√√

Example

R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF.

X000

X003

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 127

7. Instructions

( P ) Positive pulse coil

Expression

Input ( P )

Function

When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Sets device A to OFF −

ON When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON −

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON.

X000

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

128 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

( N ) Negative pulse coil

Expression

Input ( N )

Function

When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.

This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF −

When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON −

ON Sets device A to OFF −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF.

X000

R100

1 scan time 1 scan time

Note

• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.

(PN(P)(N)total)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 129

7. Instructions

TON ON delay timer

Expression

Input [ A TON B ] Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The

elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the

output and the timer device corresponding to B is turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped)

When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device

are turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation (timer is not updating) OFF

ON Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) OFF

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

APreset time √√√√√√√√√√

0 - 32767

BElapsed time √

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON.

X000

T000

T.000

Y021

Preset time (2s) Less than preset time

Preset value Note

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

• Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

6F3B0253

130 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

TOF OFF delay timer

Expression

Input [ A TOF B ] Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the

timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is

started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input

came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) OFF

ON No operation (timer is not updating) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

APreset time √√√√√√√√√√

0 - 32767

BElapsed time √

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF.

X000

T002

T.002

Y021

Preset time (1 s) Less than preset time

Preset value

Note

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

• Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 131

7. Instructions

SS Single shot timer

Expression

Input [ A SS B ] Output

Function

When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the

timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B.

When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device

are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) OFF

ON Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating) ON

Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating) OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

APreset time √√√√√√√√√√

0 - 32767

BElapsed time √

Example

Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON.

X000

T003

T.003

Y021

Preset time (1 s) Preset time (1 s)

Preset value

Note

• Time is set in 10 ms units for;

T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)

T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)

• Time is set in 100 ms units for;

T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)

T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)

• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or

SS) with the same timer register are not

allowed.

6F3B0253

132 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

CNT Counter

Expression

Count input C CNT Q Output

Enable input E A B

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from

OFF to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the

set value A, the output and the counter device corresponding to B are turned ON. When the enable

input comes OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF.

The available data range for operand A is 0 to 65535.

Execution condition

Enable

input Operation Output

OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0) OFF

ON Count value (B) < set value (A)OFF

Count value (B) ≥ set value (A)ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASet value √√√√√√√√√√

0 - 65535

BCount value √

Example

X001

X002

C010

C.010

Y021

Note

• No transitional contact is required for the

count input. The count input rising edge is

detected by this instruction.

• For the count input, direct linking to a

connecting point is not allowed. In this

case, insert a dummy contact (always ON

= S04F, etc.) just before the input.

Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

• Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with

211

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 133

7. Instructions

MCS

MCR Master control set / reset

Expression

Input [ MCS ]

[ MCR ]

Function

When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state

of left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF.

Execution condition

MCS

input Operation Output

OFF Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR −

ON Ordinary operation −

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and

X002.

Equivalent circuit

X000

X001 Y021

X002 Y022

Note

• MCS and MCR must be used as a pair.

• Nesting is not allowed.

6F3B0253

134 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

JCS

JCR Jump control set / reset

Expression

Input [ JCS ]

[ JCR ]

Function

When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When

the JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed.

Execution condition

JCS

input Operation Output

OFF Ordinary operation

ON Skips until JCR

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state

regardless of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state.

Note

• JCS and JCR must be used as a pair.

• Nesting is not allowed.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 135

7. Instructions

END End

Expression

[ END ]

Function

Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not

executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Note

• For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program.

• Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used

steps.

6F3B0253

136 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 018 MOV Data transfer

Expression

Input −[ A MOV B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example 1 (constant to register)

When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON.

Example 2 (register to register)

When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30

is 500, the data 500 is stored in RW45.

Example 3 (index modification)

When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and

the data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 137

7. Instructions

FUN 019 DMOV Double-word data transfer

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A MOV B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1⋅A is stored in double-word register

B+1⋅B. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is stored in RW17⋅RW16 and the

output is turned ON. If D0101⋅D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17⋅RW16.

6F3B0253

138 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 020 NOT Invert transfer

Expression

Input −[ A NOT B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned

ON. If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW30 0100001100100001

4321

Bit-invert

FEDCBA9876543210

D0200 1011110011011110

BCDE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 139

7. Instructions

FUN 022 XCHG Data exchange

Expression

Input −[ A XCHG B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

BOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is

23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows.

RW23 23456 RW23 291

D0100 291 D0100 23456

Before operation After operation

6F3B0253

140 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 024 TINZ Table initialize

Expression

Input −[ A TINZ (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B.

The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

nTable size 1 - 1024

BStart of

destination √√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to

D0299) and the output is turned ON.

Constant 0 D0200 0

D0201 0

D0202 0 100 registers

D0299 0

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 141

7. Instructions

FUN 025 TMOV Table transfer

Expression

Input −[ A TMOV (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting

with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of source √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 1024

BStart of

destination √√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to

D1009, and the output is turned ON.

D0500 1111 D1000 1111

D0501 2222 D1001 2222

D0502 3333 Block transfer D1002 3333 10 registers

D0509 12345 D1009 12345

Note

• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

6F3B0253

142 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 026 TNOT Table invert transfer

Expression

Input −[ A TNOT (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n

registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of source √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 1024

BStart of

destination √√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to

D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON.

D0600 H00FF D0865 HFF00

D0601 H0000 Bit-invert D0866 HFFFF

D0602 H1234 and transfer D0867 HEDCB 5 registers

D0603 H5555 D0868 HAAAA

D0604 H89AB D0869 H7654

Note

• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 143

7. Instructions

FUN 027 + Addition

Expression

Input −[ A + B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C.

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is

turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution (normal) OFF

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AAugend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BAddend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CSum √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is

stored in D0110.

If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0100 12345 +D0110 13345 R010 is OFF

Constant 1000

If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in

D0110, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100 32700 Overflow

+D0110 32767 R010 is ON

Constant 1000

6F3B0253

144 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 028 −Subtraction

Expression

Input −[ A − B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C.

If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is

turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution (normal) OFF

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AMinuend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BSubtrahend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CDifference √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result

is stored in RW50.

If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF.

D0200 15000 −RW50 12500 R010 is OFF

Constant 2500

If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is

stored in RW50, and R010 is turned ON.

D0100 -31000 Underflow

−RW50 -32768 R010 is ON

Constant 2500

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 145

7. Instructions

FUN 029 ∗Multiplication

Expression

Input −[ A ∗ B → C+1

⋅

C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in

double-length register C+1

⋅

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AMultiplicand √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BMultiplier √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CProduct √√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is

stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in

D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in

D0101⋅D0100.

D0050 1500 ×D0101⋅D0100 30000

RW05 20 D0101 H0000 (upper 16-bit)

D0100 H7530 (lower 16-bit)

6F3B0253

146 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 030 / Division

Expression

Input −[ A / B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and

the remainder in C+1.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution (B ≠ 0) ON −

No execution (B = 0) OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADividend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BDivisor √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CQuotient √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is

stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28.

If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored

in RW28.

RW22 2894 ÷RW27 8 (quotient)

Constant 325 RW28 294 (remainder)

Note

• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. [ RST S051 ] .

• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

• If operand A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in

C+1.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 147

7. Instructions

FUN 031 D+ Double-word addition

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are added, and the result is

stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and

the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution (normal) OFF

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AAugend √√√√√√√ √

BAddend √√√√√√√ √

CSum √√√√√√

Example

When R005 is ON, the data of D0011⋅D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the

result is stored in D0101⋅D0100.

If the data of D0011⋅D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101⋅D0100, and R010

is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0011⋅D0010 300000 +D0101⋅D0100 400000 R010 is OFF

Constant 100000

6F3B0253

148 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 032 D−Double-word subtraction

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D− B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1⋅B is subtracted from A+1⋅A, and the result is

stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and

the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value

-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution (normal) OFF

Execution (overflow or underflow occurred) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AMinuend √√√√√√√ √

BSubtrahend √√√√√√√ √

CDifference √√√√√√

Example

When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25⋅RW24 is subtracted from the double-word

data of D0101⋅D0100, and the result is stored in D0103⋅D0102.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25⋅RW24 is 80000, the result

1500000 is stored in D0103⋅D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)

D0101⋅D0100 1580000 −D0103⋅D0102 1500000 R010 is OFF

RW25⋅RW24 80000

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 149

7. Instructions

FUN 035 +C Addition with carry

Expression

Input −[ A +C B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is

stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater

than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution Normal No carry OFF Reset

Carry occurred OFF Set

Overflow / No carry ON Reset

underflow Carry occurred ON Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AAugend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BAddend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CSum √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101⋅D0100 and RW21⋅RW20 are

added, and the result is stored in D0201⋅D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry

flag before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 12345678 and RW21⋅RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is

stored in D0201⋅D0200.

D0101⋅D0100 12345678 +D0201⋅D0200 12400000

RW21⋅RW20 54322

6F3B0253

150 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 036 -C Subtraction with carry

Expression

Input −[ A -C B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the

result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is

greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.

This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution Normal No borrow OFF Reset

Borrow occurred OFF Set

Overflow / No borrow ON Reset

underflow Borrow occurred ON Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AMinuend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BSubtrahend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CDifference √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23⋅RW22 is subtracted from the data

of D0201⋅D0200, and the result is stored in D0211⋅D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset

the carry flag before starting the calculation.

If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 12345678 and RW23⋅RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is

stored in D0211⋅D0210.

D0201⋅D0200 12345678

-D0211⋅D0210 5678

RW23⋅RW22 12340000

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 151

7. Instructions

FUN 039 U∗Unsigned multiplication

Expression

Input −[ A U∗ B → C+1

⋅

C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in

double-length register C+1

⋅

C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AMultiplicand √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BMultiplier √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CProduct √√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is

stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in

D0100).

If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in

D0101⋅D0100.

D0050 52500 ×D0101⋅D0100 1575000

RW05 30

Note

• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

6F3B0253

152 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 040 U/ Unsigned division

Expression

Input −[ A U/ B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the

quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1.

The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution (B ≠ 0) ON −

No execution (B = 0) OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADividend √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BDivisor √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CQuotient √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is

stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051.

If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is

stored in D0051.

D0030 54321 ÷RW27 181 (quotient)

Constant 300 RW28 21 (remainder)

Note

• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.

• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.

• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 153

7. Instructions

FUN 041 DIV Unsigned double/single division

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient

is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1⋅A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data

range of B and C is 0 to 65535.

If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in

C+1, and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution (B ≠ 0) ON −

Overflow (B ≠ 0) ON Set

No execution (B = 0) OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADividend √√√√√√√ √

BDivisor √√√√√√√ √

CQuotient √√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201⋅D0200 is divided by the constant data

4000, and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001.

If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder

257 is stored in D1001.

D0201⋅D0200 332257 ÷D1000 83 (quotient)

Constant 4000 D1001 257 (remainder)

Note

• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.

The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.

• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.

6F3B0253

154 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 043 +1 Increment

Expression

Input −[ +1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and

stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution.

D0050 D0050

750 + 1 751

Note

• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the

execution, it will be -32768 after the execution.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 155

7. Instructions

FUN 045 -1 Decrement

Expression

Input −[ -1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and

stored in D0050.

If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution.

D0050 D0050

1022 - 1 1021

Note

• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the

execution, it will be 32767 after the execution.

6F3B0253

156 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 048 AND AND

Expression

Input −[ A AND B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BSource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CAND √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant

data HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030.

If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW12 0011010001010110

3456

AND

Constant 1111111100000000

FF00

D0030 0011010000000000

3400

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 157

7. Instructions

FUN 050 OR OR

Expression

Input −[ A OR B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Bsource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

COR √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the

result is stored in D0031.

If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW13 0101011001111000

5678

RW20 0100001100100001

4321

D0031 0101011101111001

5779

6F3B0253

158 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 052 EOR Exclusive OR

Expression

Input −[ A EOR B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds exclusive OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Bsource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CExclusive OR √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and

the result is stored in D1000.

If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000.

FEDCBA9876543210

D1000 0101011001111000

5678

Exclusive OR

D0300 0100001100100001

4321

D1000 0001010101011001

1559

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 159

7. Instructions

FUN 056 MAVE Moving average

Expression

Input −[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latest n scan’s register A

data, and stores it in C. The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.

The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AInput data √√√√√√√√√√ √

nData size 1 - 64

BStart of table √√√√√√

COutput data √√√√√√√√

Example

The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average

value of them is calculated and stored in D0010.

D0011 is used as internal work data.

XW04 D0010

1st scan 1000 200 = (1000) / 5

2nd scan 1005 401 = (1000 + 1005) / 5

3rd scan 1009 603 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5

4th scan 1012 805 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5

5th scan 1007 1006 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5

6th scan 1004 1007 = (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5

7th scan 998 1006 = (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5

8th scan 994 1003 = (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5

6F3B0253

160 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 061 DFL Digital Filter

Expression

Input −[ A DFL B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for

input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C.

()

yFLxFLy

nnn

=− × + × −

Here; xn is input data specified by A

FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999)

yn is output data to be stored in C

yn-1 is output data at last scan

This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal. C+1 is used for internal work data.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to

9999) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AInput data √√√√√√√√√√ √

BFilter constant √√√√√√√

COutput data √√√√√√

Example

The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data)

XW04

D0110

Time

XW04

D0110

Time

When D0100 value is largeWhen D0100 value is small

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 161

7. Instructions

FUN 062 HTOA Hex to ASCII conversion

Expression

Input −[ A HTOA (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII

characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of

destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range of n is 1 to 32.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

nData size 1 - 32

BDestination √√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and

stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200.

F0 F870

D0100 H0123 D0220 “1” (H31) “0” (H30)

D0101 H4567 Converted D0221 “3” (H33) “2” (H32)

D0102 H89AB D0222 “5” (H35) “4” (H34)

D0103 HCDEF D0223 “7” (H37) “6” (H36)

D0224 “9” (H39) “8” (H38)

D0225 “B” (H42) “A” (H41)

D0226 “D” (H44) “C” (H43)

D0227 “F” (H46) “E” (H45)

Note

• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise,

boundary error will occur.

6F3B0253

162 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 063 ATOH ASCII to Hex conversion

Expression

Input −[ A ATOH (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into

hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost

digit of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table

is “0” (H30) to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range of n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

Conversion data error (no execution) OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

nData size 1 - 64

BDestination √√√√√√

Example

When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted

into hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040.

F870 F 0

D0300 “1” (H31) “0” (H30) RW040 H0123

D0301 “3” (H33) “2” (H32) Converted RW041 H4567

D0302 “5” (H35) “4” (H34) RW042 H89AB

D0303 “7” (H37) “6” (H36) RW043 HCDEF

D0304 “9” (H39) “8” (H38)

D0305 “B” (H42) “A” (H41)

D0306 “D” (H44) “C” (H43)

D0307 “F” (H46) “E” (H45)

Note

• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed.

• If n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 163

7. Instructions

FUN 064 TEST Bit test

Expression

Input −[ A TEST B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets

the output to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution When the result is not 0 ON

When the result is 0 OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BTest data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if

the result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to

R07B is ON.)

If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW07 0100000000001000

4008

AND

Constant 0000111111111111

0FFF

Result is not 0

Result 0000000000001000 R00A comes ON

6F3B0253

164 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 068 SHR1 1 bit shift right

Expression

Input −[ SHR1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in

the left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the

operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When LSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When LSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

RW15 0100001010001010

RW15 0010000101000101 0

(Result)

0 R001 is turned ON

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 165

7. Instructions

FUN 069 SHL1 1 bit shift left

Expression

Input −[ SHL1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in

the right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the

operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When MSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When MSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

1110011100111010

1 1100111001110100

R002 is turned ON 0

RW15

RW15 (Result)

6F3B0253

166 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 070 SHR n bit shift right

Expression

Input −[ A SHR n → B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including

the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the

right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When LSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When LSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

nShift bits 1 - 16

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

RW18 0100001010011010

RW20 0000001000010100 1

(Result)

0 R001 is turned OFF

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 167

7. Instructions

FUN 071 SHL n bit shift left

Expression

Input −[ A SHL n → B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the

carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left

most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When MSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When MSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

nShift bits 1 - 16

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

1010011100111010

1 0011100111010000

R002 is turned OFF 0

RW18

RW20 (Result)

6F3B0253

168 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 074 SR Shift register

Expression

Data input − D SR Q − Output

Shift input − S (n)

Enable input − E A

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,

1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is

stored in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable

input Operation Output CF

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table OFF Reset

ON When the shift input is ON Shift execution Last bit Set or reset

When the shift input is OFF No execution state −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ALeading device √√√

nDevice size 1 - 64

Example

32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction

when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the

leading bit (R100).

The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 169

7. Instructions

The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

CF R11F R11E R11D R11C R103 R102 R101 R100 X008

1001 0011 0

1 001 0110

R011 is turned OFF

Note

• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional

contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.

• For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this

case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input.

( )

D SR QNot allowed

S (n)

E A

Dummy contact

( )

D SR QAllowed

S (n)

E A

Shift result

6F3B0253

170 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 075 DSR Bi-directional shift register

Expression

Data input − D DSR Q − Output

Shift input − S (n)

Enable input − E

Direction input − L A

Function

While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with

A, 1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction

input (L).

When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction).

When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction).

The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A

if left shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).

When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Enable

input Operation Output CF

OFF Resets all bits in the bit table OFF Reset

ON S = ON L = ON Shift left execution Highest bit state Set or reset

L = OFF Shift right execution Lowest bit state Set or reset

S = OFF No execution Highest bit state −

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ALeading device √√√

nDevice size 1 - 64

Example

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 171

7. Instructions

9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register.

When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF)

The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.

While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled.

• When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper

address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of

X008 is stored in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest

bit (R208).

• When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower

address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of

X008 is stored in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest

bit (R200).

The figure below shows an operation example.

(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

CF R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200 X008

100110011 0

1 001100110

R012 is turned OFF

(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)

X008 R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200 CF

1 001100110

100110011 0

R012 is turned ON

Note

• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional

contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.

• For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not

allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just

before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

Shift result

6F3B0253

172 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 078 RTR1 1 bit rotate right

Expression

Input −[ RTR1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed

out bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the

operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When LSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When LSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

RW15 0100001010001010

RW15 0010000101000101 0

(Result)

R001 is turned ON

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 173

7. Instructions

FUN 079 RTL1 1 bit rotate left

Expression

Input −[ RTL1 A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed

out bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the

operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When MSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When MSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

1110011100111010

1 1100111001110101

R002 is turned ON

RW15

RW15 (Result)

6F3B0253

174 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 080 RTR n bit rotate right

Expression

Input −[ A RTR n → B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored

in B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When LSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When LSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

nShift bits 1 - 16

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

RW18 0100001010011010

RW20 1101001000010100 1

(Result)

R001 is turned OFF

∗

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 175

7. Instructions

FUN 081 RTL n bit rotate left

Expression

Input −[ A RTL n → B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored

in B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution When MSB = 1 ON Set or reset

When MSB = 0 OFF Set or reset

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

nShift bits 1 - 16

BDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the

result is stored in RW20.

The figure below shows an operation example.

(MSB) (LSB)

FEDCBA9876543210

1010011100111010

1 0011100111010101

R002 is turned OFF

RW18

RW20 (Result)

∗

6F3B0253

176 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 090 MPX Multiplexer

Expression

Input −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting

with A, is transferred to C.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Normal execution OFF

Pointer over (no execution) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 64

BPointer √√√√√√√√√√ 0 - 63

CDestination √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table

D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005.

If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005.

Source table Pointer Destination

D0500 0 D0005 12345

D0501 1

D0507 12345 7

D0508 8

D0509 9

Note

• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer

is not executed and the output comes ON.

• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 177

7. Instructions

FUN 091 DPX Demultiplexer

Expression

Input −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated by B in the

table, size n starting with C.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Normal execution OFF

Pointer over (no execution) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

nTable size 1 - 64

BPointer √√√√√√√√√√ 0 - 63

CStart of table √√√√√√

Example

When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by

RW30 in the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size).

If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508.

Source Destination table Pointer

XW04 3210 D0500 0

D0501 1

D0507 7

D0508 3210 8

D0509 9

Note

• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer

is not executed and the output comes ON.

• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.

6F3B0253

178 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 096 >Greater than

Expression

Input −[ A > B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A > BON

A ≤ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data

of D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000 >Constant 2500 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -100 ≤Constant 2500 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 179

7. Instructions

FUN 097 >= Greater than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A >= B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or

equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≥ BON

A < BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000 ≥D0020 3000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -1500 <D0020 0 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

180 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 098 =Equal

Expression

Input −[ A = B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A = BON

A ≠ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 3000 =D0030 3000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 -1500 ≠D0030 0 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 181

7. Instructions

FUN 099 <> Not equal

Expression

Input −[ A <> B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≠ BON

A = BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 10 ≠Constant 0 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0 =Constant 0 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

182 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 100 <Less than

Expression

Input −[ A < B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A < BON

A ≥ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 10 and that of D0040 is 15, the comparison result is true. Consequently,

R020 is turned ON.

D0125 10 <D0040 15 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0 and that of D0040 is -50, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0 ≥D0040 0 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 183

7. Instructions

FUN 101 <= Less than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A <= B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal

to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≤ BON

A > BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data -100, and if the data

of D0125 is less than or equal to -100, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is -150, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 -150 <Constant -100 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0 ≥Constant -100 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

6F3B0253

184 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 102 D>Double-word greater than

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is

greater than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A > B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and

if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is

turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 250000 >Constant 200000 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is

turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 -100 ≤Constant 200000 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 185

7. Instructions

FUN 103 D>= Double-word greater than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is

greater than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A < B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word

data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of

D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 250000 ≥D0251⋅D0250 200000 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 -100 <D0251⋅D0250 0 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

186 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 104 D=Double-word equal

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is

equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A = B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word

data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is equal to the data of D0251⋅D0250,

R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 250000 =D0251⋅D0250 250000 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 -100 ≠D0251⋅D0250 0 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 187

7. Instructions

FUN 105 D<> Double-word not equal

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is not

equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A = B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word

data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is not equal to the data of

D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 250000 ≠D0251⋅D0250 250000 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 -100 =D0251⋅D0250 -100 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

188 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 106 D<Double-word less than

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is

less than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A < B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and

if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 250000 <Constant 427780 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 430000 ≥Constant 427780 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 189

7. Instructions

FUN 107 D<= Double-word less than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is

less than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅BON

A+1⋅A > B+1⋅BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√ √

Example

When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the

data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than or equal to 0, R014 is turned ON.

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -1, R014 is turned ON.

D0101⋅D0100 -1 ≤Constant 0 R014 is ON

If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 10000, R014 is turned OFF.

D0101⋅D0100 10000 >Constant 0 R014 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).

6F3B0253

190 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 108 U>Unsigned greater than

Expression

Input −[ A U> B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A > BON

A ≤ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the

data of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 52000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 52000 >Constant 40000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned

OFF.

D0125 21000 ≤Constant 40000 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 191

7. Instructions

FUN 109 U>= Unsigned greater than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A >= B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or

equal to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≥ BON

A < BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of

D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 40000 and that of D0020 is 40000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 40000 ≥D0020 40000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 15000 and that of D0020 is 20000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 15000 <D0020 20000 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

192 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 110 U=Unsigned equal

Expression

Input −[ A U= B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A = BON

A ≠ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of

D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000 and that of D0020 is 35000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 35000 =D0030 35000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 1500 and that of D0020 is 4000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 1500 ≠D0030 4000 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 193

7. Instructions

FUN 111 U<> Unsigned not equal

Expression

Input −[ A U<> B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≠ BON

A = BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of

D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 41000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 41000 ≠Constant 0 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 0 =Constant 0 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

194 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 112 U<Unsigned less than

Expression

Input −[ A U< B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A < BON

A ≥ BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of

D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 43000 and that of D0040 is 45000, the comparison result is true.

Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 43000 <D0040 45000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 50000 and that of D0040 is 50000, the comparison result is false.

Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 50000 ≥D0040 50000 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 195

7. Instructions

FUN 113 U<= Unsigned less than or equal

Expression

Input −[ A U<= B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal

to B, the output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution A ≤ BON

A > BOFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACompared

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BReference

data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

Example

When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 35000, and if the

data of D0125 is less than or equal to 35000, R020 is turned ON.

If the data of D0125 is 35000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.

D0125 35000 ≤Constant 35000 R020 is ON

If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.

D0125 38000 >Constant 35000 R020 is OFF

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).

6F3B0253

196 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 114 SET Device/register set

Expression

Input −[ SET A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice or

Example 1 (device set)

When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes

OFF.

Example 2 (register set)

When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 197

7. Instructions

FUN 115 RST Device/register reset

Expression

Input −[ RST A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF if A is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice or

Example 1 (device reset)

When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes

OFF.

Example 2 (register reset)

When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF)

The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.

6F3B0253

198 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 118 SETC Set carry

Expression

Input −[ SETC ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution ON Set

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 199

7. Instructions

FUN 119 RSTC Reset carry

Expression

Input −[ RSTC ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output CF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Execution ON Reset

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF.

6F3B0253

200 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 120 ENC Encode

Expression

Input −[ A ENC (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit

table, size 2n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

There is no ON bit (no execution) OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 8

BEncode result √√√√√√√√√

Example

25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the

position is stored in D0010.

The following figure shows an operation example.

RW06 RW05

313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109 3210

00000100100110000111010 0010

D0010 26

Note

• If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 201

7. Instructions

FUN 121 DEC Decode

Expression

Input −[ A DEC (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A

to ON in the bit table, size 2n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADecode source √√√√√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 8

BStart of table √√√√√√

Example

25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.

When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to

ON, and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF.

The following figure shows an operation example.

FEDCBA9876543210

D0011 1 1000

Ignored H18 (=24)

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 3 2 1 0

00000001000000000000000 0000

RW06 RW05

Sets ON

6F3B0253

202 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 122 BC Bit count

Expression

Input −[ A BC B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result

in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

BCount data √√√√√√

Example

When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result

is stored in D0102.

The following figure shows an operation example.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW0320010011101011000

Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7

FEDCBA9876543210

D0102 0000000000000111

The result data (7) is stored in binary

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 203

7. Instructions

FUN 128 CALL Subroutine call

Expression

Input −[ CALL N. n ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine number n.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nSubroutine

number √ (Note)

Example

When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned

from the subroutine, the output is turned ON.

Main program Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

• In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be

used in a subroutine.

• In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels)

• The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the

same subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program.

6F3B0253

204 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 129 RET Subroutine return

Expression

−−[ RET ]−

Function

This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this

instruction, it is returned to the original CALL instruction.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

-Execution -

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Main program Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).

• The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

• The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 205

7. Instructions

FUN 132 FOR FOR (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input −[ FOR n ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times

repeatedly in a scan.

When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once)

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No repetition OFF

ON Repetition ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nRepetition

times √√√√√√√√√√

1 - 32767

Example

This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan.

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a

scan.

R005

| | [ FOR 30 ]

[ NEXT ]

Executed 30 times in a scan when

R005 is ON.

6F3B0253

206 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 133 NEXT NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop)

Expression

Input −[ NEXT ]− Output

Function

This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop.

If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the

next instruction.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Forcibly breaks the repetition OFF

ON Repetition ON

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a

scan. In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to

D0029 are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer)

Note

• The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one.

• Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a

FOR-NEXT loop.

• The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung.

• The following connection is not allowed.

| | [ FOR n ] | | [ NEXT ]

| | | |

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 207

7. Instructions

FUN 137 SUBR Subroutine entry

Expression

−[ SUBR (n) ]−−

Function

This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

-Execution -

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nSubroutine

number √ (Note)

Example

The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated.

Main program Subroutine

| | [ CALL N.008 ] [ SUBR (008)]

[ RET ]

Note

• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).

• Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129).

• The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.

• Nesting of subroutine is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a

subroutine.

• No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction.

6F3B0253

208 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 140 EI Enable interrupt

Expression

Input −[ EI ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,

i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables

the interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption

between each instructions.

Note

• Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141).

• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting

and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

• The EI instruction can be used only in the main program.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 209

7. Instructions

FUN 141 DI Disable interrupt

Expression

Input −[ DI ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,

i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000

is OFF.

Note

• Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140).

• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting

and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.

• The DI instruction can be used only in the main program.

6F3B0253

210 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 142 IRET Interrupt return

Expression

−−[ IRET ]−

Function

This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this

instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine).

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

-Execution -

Operand

No operand is required.

Example

Note

• The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program.

• There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program.

An interrupt program

(Timer interrupt,

I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 211

7. Instructions

FUN 143 WDT Watchdog timer reset

Expression

Input −[ WDT n ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms.

Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction

can be used to extend the detection time.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nExtend time 1 - 100

Example

When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no

effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms.

Normal detection point Extended point

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 (ms)

Extended by 200 ms

Scan

WDT instruction

execution

Note

• As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the

T1/T1S, it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n.

6F3B0253

212 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 144 STIZ Step sequence initialize

Expression

Input −[ STIZ (n) A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON.

This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to

describe a sequential operation.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution at the rising edge of the input ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nSize of step

sequence 1 - 64

AStart device √

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401

to R409) are reset to OFF.

This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400.

R409 R408 R407 R406 R405 R404 R403 R402 R401 R400

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

10 devices starting with R400

Note

• The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to

configure the step sequence.

• The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 213

7. Instructions

FUN 145 STIN Step sequence input

Expression

Input −[ STIN A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON When A is ON ON

When A is OFF OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStep device √

Example

The following sequential operation is performed.

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401

to R409) are reset to OFF.

When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON.

When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON.

R020

X004

X005

R022

R400

R401

R402

6F3B0253

214 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 146 STOT Step sequence output

Expression

Input −[ STOT A ]−

Function

When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same

rung are reset to OFF.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution -

ON Execution -

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStep device √

Example

See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction.

Note

• The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence.

• Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences.

• Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop

or convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung)

• To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows.

This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only.

[ STIN A ] | | [ STOT B ] [ STIN A ] | | [ STOT B ]

| | [ STOT C ] [ STIN A ] | | [ STOT C ]

Not allowed Available

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 215

7. Instructions

FUN 147 F/F Flip-flop

Expression

Set input − S F/F Q − Output

Reset input − R A

Function

When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is

reset to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both

the set and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF.

The state of the output is the same as the device A.

Execution condition

Set

input Reset

input Operation Output

OFF OFF No execution (A remains previous state) Same

ON Resets A to OFF as A

ON OFF Sets A to ON

ON Resets A to OFF

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ADevice √√√

Example

When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are

ON, R10E is reset to OFF.

An example timing diagram is shown below.

X003

X004

R10E

Note

• For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy

contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.

6F3B0253

216 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 149 U/D Up-down counter

Expression

Direction input − U U/D Q − Output

Count input − C

Enable input − E A

Function

While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from

OFF to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction

input. The count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535.

• Up count when the direction input is ON

• Down count when the direction input is OFF

When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0.

Execution condition

Enable

input Operation Output

OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0) OFF

ON Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535) OFF

Count value is limit value and count input is ON ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACount value √

Example

X005

X006

R010

C005

C.005

Note

• The transitional contact is required for

the count input. Otherwise, counting is

executed every scan during X005 is ON

in this example.

• For the direction input and the count

input, direct linking to a connecting point

is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift

233 22 111

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 217

7. Instructions

FUN 154 CLND Set calendar

Expression

Input −[ A CLND ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers

starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the

output is turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation OFF

ON Execution (data is valid)) OFF

No execution (data is not valid) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

Example

When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the

output is OFF (R0031 is OFF).

If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is

turned ON (R0031 comes ON).

F870

Allowable data range (2-digit BCD)

D0050 H00 Year H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089)

D0051 H00 Month H01 to H12

D0052 H00 Day H01 to H31 Calendar

D0053 H00 Hour H00 to H23 LSI

D0054 H00 Minute H00 to H59

D0055 H00 Second H00 to H59

Note

• The day of the week is automatically.

6F3B0253

218 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 155 CLDS Calendar operation

Expression

Input −[ A CLDS B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with

A from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B.

If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is

turned ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation OFF

ON Execution (data is valid)) OFF

No execution (data is not valid) ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASubtrahend √√√√√√√

BResult √√√√√√

Example

When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from

the current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105.

In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid

data, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON).

F0 F0

H0098 D0050 H0097 D0100 H0000 (Year)

H0001 D0051 H0010 D0101 H0003 (Month)

H0015 minus D0052 H0010 D0102 H0007 (Day)

H0017 D0053 H0015 D0103 H0001 (Hour)

H0000 D0054 H0030 D0104 H0030 (Minute)

H0000 D0055 H0000 D0105 H0000 (Second)

Note

• Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A.

• In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days.

Current date & time

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 219

7. Instructions

FUN 156 PID3 Pre-derivative real PID

Expression

Input −[ A PID3 B → C ]− Output

Function

Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feed-

back control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features.

• For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency

noise and to expand the stable application range,

• Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV, by using digital PID

algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID.

• Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction.

• Digital filter is available for PV.

• Direct / reverse operation is selectable.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF Initialization OFF

ON Execute PID every setting interval ON when

execution

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XW YW RW SW T C D I J K

ATop of input data √√√√√√√

BTop of parameter √√√√√√√

CTop of output data √√√√√√

Input data Control parameter Output data

AProcess input value PVC BProportional gain KPCManipulation value MV

A+1 A-mode set value ASV B+1 Integral time TIC+1 Last error en-1

A+2 C-mode set value CSV B+2 Derivative time TDC+2 Last derivative value Dn-1

A+3 M-mode MV input MMV B+3 Dead-band GP C+3 Last PV PVn-1

A+4 MV tracking input TMV B+4 A-mode initial SV ISV C+4 Last SV SVn-1

A+5 Mode setting MODE B+5 Input filter constant FT C+5 Integral remainder Ir

B+6 ASV differential limit DSV C+6 Derivative remainder Dr

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV C+7 Internal MV MVn

A-mode: Auto mode B+8 Initial status STS C+8 Internal counter C

C-mode: Cascade mode B+9 MV upper limit MH C+9 Control interval ∆

∆∆

∆t

M-mode: Manual mode B+10 MV lower limit ML

B+11 MV differential limit DMV

B+12 Control interval setting n

6F3B0253

220 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Control block diagram

TI⋅s

Differential limit

Derivative

Proportional

Integral

Differential ∆MVn

(η = 0.1)

MVS: Velocity → Position

MVn = MVn-1 ± ∆MVn

H/L: Upper / lower limit

DMV: Differential limit

MVCn

MVn

Manual

mode

Cascade

mode

Auto

mode

Digtal filter

MMV

PVC

∆D

∆Pn

∆I

PVn

SVn

CSV

ASV

TD⋅s

1+η⋅TD⋅s

1+T⋅s

Gap KPMVS H/L DMV

DSV

DMMV

Integral

control

Integral action control:

When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action

is stopped.

Velocity → Position conversion:

In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased. → MVn = MVn-1 - ∆Mvn

In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased. → MVn = MVn-1 + ∆MVn

Gap (dead-band) operation:

Error e

SV - PV

GP (%) GP (%)

Algorithm

Digital filter:

PV FT PVC FT PV

=− ⋅ + ⋅ −

()11

Here, 0 000 0 999..≤≤FT

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 221

7. Instructions

PID algorithm:

∆∆∆∆

∆

MV K P I D

MV MV MV

nnnn

nn n

=⋅ ++

=±

−

()

Here, ∆Pee

eSVPV

nnn

=−

−1

∆∆

IetIr

=⋅+

∆∆

∆

DTPV PV tD Dr

DD D

nn n

=⋅−−⋅+

+⋅

−−

−

()

Parameter details

AProcess input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000

A+1 Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000

A+2 Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000

A+3 Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

A+4 MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

A+5 Mode setting MODE

FC840

Operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Tracking designation

0 : No

1 : Yes

BProportional gain KP (0.00 to 327.67) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+1 Integral time TI (0.000 to 32.767 min., ∆In=0 if TI =0) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+2 Derivative time TD (0.000 to 32.767 min.) Data range: 0 to 32767

B+3 Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %) Data range: 0 to 1000

B+4 Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %) Data range: 0 to 10000

B+5 Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999) Data range: 0 to 999

B+6 ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000

B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000

(If GP ≠ 0, Gap is applied)

(If TI = 0, then ∆In = 0)

(Fixed)

6F3B0253

222 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

B+8 Initial status STS

FC840

Initial operation mode

00 : Manual mode

01 : Auto mode

10 : Cascade mode

11 : (Reserve)

Direct / reverse selection

0 : Direct

1 : Reverse

B+9 MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

B+10 MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

B+11 MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000

B+12 Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times) Data range: 1 to 32767

Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval ∆t = n × constant scan interval

(It is treated as n = 1 when n ≤ 0)

CManipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %) Data range: -2500 to 12500

C+1

: Internal work area

C+9

Operation

1. When the instruction input is OFF:

Initializes the PID3 instruction.

Operation mode is set as specified by B+8.A+5 bit 0, 1 ← B+8 bit 0, 1

Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4. ASV ← ISV

Manual mode MV is set as current MV. MMV ← MV

Internal calculation data is initialized.

MV remains unchanged.

2. When the instruction input is ON:

Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are

available according to the setting of A+5.

• Auto mode

This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value.

Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV

are effective.

Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value

MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 223

7. Instructions

• Manual mode

In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV.

MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective.

When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV.

• Cascade mode

This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value.

Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower

limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.

Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation

value MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)

And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is

over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV ← CSV)

• MV tracking

This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation (A+5 bit 2) is ON,

tracking input TMV is directly output as MV.

Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective.

When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV.

Note

• PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program.

• PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected

in the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments.

• The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation

value MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this

purpose, the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient.

6F3B0253

224 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 160 UL Upper limit

Expression

Input −[ A UL B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B)

If A ≤ B, then C = A.

If A > B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation OFF

ON Execution: not limited (A ≤ B)OFF

Execution: limited (A > B)ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BUpper limit √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of

D1200, and the result is stored in RW021.

When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF.

When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040

is ON.

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

(RW021) Upper limit B (D1200)

A (RW018)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 225

7. Instructions

FUN 161 LL Lower limit

Expression

Input −[ A LL B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B)

If A ≥ B, then C = A.

If A < B, then C = B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No operation OFF

ON Execution: not limited (A ≥ B)OFF

Execution: limited (A < B)ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AOperation data √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

BLower limit √√√√√√√√√√ √ √

CDestination √√√√√√√√√ √

Example

When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of

D1220, and the result is stored in RW022.

When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF.

When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041

is ON.

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

(RW022)

Lower limit B (D1220)

A (RW019)

6F3B0253

226 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 162 MAX Maximum value

Expression

Input −[ A MAX (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of size n

words starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of

the maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 64

BResult √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10

words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501.

Pointer

D0200 100 0

D0201 10000 1

D0202 -1000 2

D0203 10 3

D0204 0 4

D0205 200 5

D0206 -300 6

D0207 20000 7 D0500 20000 (Maximum value)

D0208 -30 8 D0501 7 (Pointer)

D0209 20 9

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

• If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 227

7. Instructions

FUN 163 MIN Minimum value

Expression

Input −[ A MIN (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of size n

words starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of

the minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 64

BResult √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10

words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511.

Pointer

D0200 100 0

D0201 10000 1

D0202 -1000 2 D0510 -1000 (Minimum value)

D0203 10 3 D0511 2 (Pointer)

D0204 0 4

D0205 200 5

D0206 -300 6

D0207 20000 7

D0208 -30 8

D0209 20 9

Note

• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).

• If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.

• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.

6F3B0253

228 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 164 AVE Average value

Expression

Input −[ A AVE (n) B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in the n

registers starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table size n

is 1 to 64.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AStart of table √√√√√√√

nTable size 1 - 64

BResult √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209

(10 words), and the average value is stored in D0520.

D0200 100

D0201 10000

D0202 -1000

D0203 10

D0204 0 D0520 2900 (Average value)

D0205 200

D0206 -300

D0207 20000

D0208 -30

D0209 20

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 229

7. Instructions

FUN 165 FG Function generator

Expression

Input −[ A FG (n) B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value f(x) for A as x, and stores it in C. The

function f(x) is defined by the parameters stored in 2 × n registers starting with B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AInput value x√√√√√√√√√√ √

nParameter size 1 - 32

BStart of

parameters √√√√√√√

CFunction value

f(x) √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value f(x) for x = XW004, and stores

the result in D0100.

The function f(x) is defined by 2 × 4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example,

these parameters are set at the first scan.

6F3B0253

230 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Parameter table

4 registers for x parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding f(x) parameters

D0600 -2000 x1

D0601 -100 x2

D0602 100 x3

D0603 2000 x4

D0604 -1800 y1

D0605 -300 y2

D0606 300 y3

D0607 1800 y4

The FG instruction interpolators f(x) value for x based on the n parameters of (xi,yi).

For example, if XW04 is 1500 (x = 1500), the result 1405 (f(x) = 1405) is stored in D0100.

Note

• The order of the x parameters should be x1

≤

...

≤

...

≤

xn. In the above example, the

data of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600 ≤ D0601 ≤ D0602 ≤ D0603.

• If x is smaller than x1, y1 is given as f(x). In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in

D0100 if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000).

• If x is greater than xn, yn is given as f(x). In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in

D0100 if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000).

• The valid data range is -32768 to 32767.

y(x4,y4)

1800

y = f(x)

300 (x3,y3)

2000100

-100-2000

(x2,y2)-300

(x1,y1)-1800

1800

1405

300

1500

2000100

-100-2000

-300

-1800

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 231

7. Instructions

FUN 180 ABS Absolute value

Expression

Input −[ A ABS B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√

Example

When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121.

For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121.

Note

• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B.

32767

12000

0 32767-12000-32767

D0121

RW38

6F3B0253

232 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 182 NEG 2’s complement

Expression

Input −[ A NEG B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122.

For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122.

2’s complement data is calculated as follows.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW39 0001001000110100 (4660)

1110110111001011 (-4661)

D0122 1110110111001100 (-4660)

Note

• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is

stored in B.

Bit inverse

+ 1

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 233

7. Instructions

FUN 183 DNEG Double-word 2’s complement

Expression

Input −[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1⋅A,

and stores it in B+1⋅B.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√ √

BDestination √√√√√√

Example

When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register

RW41⋅RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151⋅D0150.

For example, if RW41⋅RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored

in D0151⋅D0150.

Note

• The data range of A+1⋅A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1⋅A is -2147483648,

the same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1⋅B.

6F3B0253

234 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 185 7SEG 7 segment decode

Expression

Input −[ A 7SEG B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data of A into the 7 segment code,

and stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource √√√√√√√√√√ √

BDestination √√√√√√√√√

Example

When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and

the result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10.

For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10.

FEDCBA9876543210

RW15 0000000000001001 (H0009)

Upper 12 bits are ignored

RW10 0000000001101111 (H006F)

0 is stored in upper 8 bits

The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page.

7 segment decode

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 235

7. Instructions

Operand A (lower 4 bits) 7 segment LED Operand B (lower 8 bits) Display

Hex Binary composition B7B6B5B4B3B2B1B0

0 0000 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 0001 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

2 0010 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

3 0011 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1

4 0100 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

5 0101 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

6 0110 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

7 0111 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

8 1000 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

9 1001 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

A 1010 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

B 1011 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

C 1100 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D 1101 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0

E 1110 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

F 1111 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

B5 B1

B4 B2

6F3B0253

236 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 186 ASC ASCII conversion

Expression

Input −[ A ASC B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes,

and stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum)

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ACharacters √

BStart of

destination √√√√√√

Example

When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and

the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207).

High Low

F 8 7 0

D0200 H42 (B) H41 (A)

D0201 H44 (D) H43 (C)

D0202 H46 (F) H45 (E)

D0203 H48 (H) H47 (G)

D0204 H4A (J) H49 (I)

D0205 H4C (L) H4B (K)

D0206 H4E (N) H4D (M)

D0207

Note

• Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above

example, 14 characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are

stored in 7 registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged.

Previous data is remained

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 237

7. Instructions

FUN 188 BIN Binary conversion

Expression

Input −[ A BIN B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data of A into binary, and stores

in B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not

executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

BCD data error OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource (BCD) √√√√√√√√√√H0000 -

H9999

BDestination

(Binary) √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is

stored in D0127.

For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127.

RW28 BCD to Binary D0127

H1234 1234

Note

• If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed

and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

6F3B0253

238 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

FUN 190 BCD BCD conversion

Expression

Input −[ A BCD B ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the

data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error

flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

Binary data error OFF Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource

(Binary) √√√√√√√√√√0 - 9999

BDestination

(BCD) √√√√√√√√√

Example

When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in

RW22.

For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22.

D0211 Binary to BCD RW22

5432 H5432

Note

• If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 239

7. Instructions

FUN 235 I/O Direct I/O

Expression

Input −[ I/O (n) A ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output

(YW) registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A.

• For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit

• For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit

Execution condition

Input Operation Output

OFF No execution OFF

ON Execution ON

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

nRegister size 1 - 32

AStart of

registers √√

Example

When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated

immediately.

XW00 Input

XW01 circuit

YW02 Output

YW03 circuit

6F3B0253

240 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Note

• In the T1-16S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction.

Input on basic unit Output on basic unit I/O module

X000 - X007 Y020 - Y027 Not effective

• The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed

in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 241

7. Instructions

FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer

Expression

Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output

Function

When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly

designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The

transfer size (number of words) is designated by B.

The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM)

Data transfer between the following objects are available.

• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ EEPROM (D register)

• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

When error is occurred (see Note) ON Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

ASource

parameter √√√√√√√

BTransfer size √√√√√√√

CDestination

parameter √√√√√√

Parameters

Source parameter Transfer size and status Destination parameter

AType BTransfer size CType

A+1 Leading address B+1 Status flag for RS-485 port C+1 Leading address

B+2 (max. 2 words)

RW register (RAM) H0003 0 to 255 1 to 256

D register (RAM) H0004 0 to 4095 1 to 256

D register (EEPROM) H0020 0 to 2047 1 to 32 (if destination)

1 to 256 (if source)

T1S RS-485 port H0030 0 (fixed) 1 to 256

6F3B0253

242 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

CPU register ↔

↔↔

↔ built-in EEPROM

In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows.

T1-16S

D0000 Page 1

(32 words)

D0031

D0032 Page 2

(32 words)

D0063

D2016 Page 64

(32 words)

D2047

Example

When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written

into the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025).

D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in

RAM). D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32)

and D1004 (16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM).

Note

• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until

resetting to OFF by user program.

(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit.

(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.

(3) When the transfer combination is invalid.

• The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention

not to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction)

• Once data writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for

the duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing.

• The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.

If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed

in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.

• Writing data into the EEPROM is

available within one page at a

time. (max. 32 words)

• For data reading from the

EEPROM, there is no need to

consider the pages.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 243

7. Instructions

CPU register ↔

↔↔

↔ T1S RS-485 port

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code)

which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU

registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length

(in bytes) are stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete.

Example

Source designation Transfer size Destination designation

D0000 H0030 D0002 00256 (fixed) D0005 H0004

D0001 00000 D0003 Execution status D0006 00100

D0004 Message length

T1S RS-485 port D0100 (CPU register)

When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after.

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error)

H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes)

H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow

H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

Baudrate Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps 15 seconds

4800 bps 7 seconds

9600 bps 3 seconds

19200 bps 1.5 seconds

Message length: 0 .............. No receive message

1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes

Note

• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until

resetting to OFF by user program.

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is other than 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

6F3B0253

244 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from

start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution

status is stored in the status flag.

The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete.

Example

Source designation Transfer size Destination designation

D0010 H00 H04 D0012 00012 D0015 H00 H30

D0011 00500 D0013 Execution status D0016 00000

D0500 (CPU register) T1S RS-485 port

When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of

D0500 to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port.

Execution status: H0000 ... Normal complete

H0001 ... During transmitting the message

H0002 ... Communication busy

H0003 ... During the reset operation

H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code)

H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table)

Baudrate Time-out setting

300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds

2400 bps 15 seconds

4800 bps 7 seconds

9600 bps 3 seconds

19200 bps 1.5 seconds

Note

• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the

instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until

resetting to OFF by user program.

(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.

(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256.

(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.

(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 245

7. Instructions

FUN 236 XFER Expanded data transfer (Inverter connection mode)

Expression

Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output

Function

This function is provided to control Toshiba Inverters VF-A7/G7/S9 connected on the RS-485 line.

When the RS-485 port operation mode is set to the Inverter mode (SW56 = 3), the T1-16S can

perform the following functions for up to 63 Inverters.

(1) Cyclically scans the Inverters and sends/receives the following data to/from each Inverter.

• Send to Inverter: Frequency reference write and Operation command write (Run, Stop, etc.)

• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor

(2) Cyclically scans the Inverters and receives the following data from each Inverter.

• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor

(3) Sends a specified Read command to a specified Inverter and stores the response data.

(4) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to a specified Inverter.

(5) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to all the connected inverters as

broadcast.

Execution condition

Input Operation Output ERF

OFF No execution OFF −

ON Normal execution ON −

When error is occurred (see Note) ON Set

Operand

Name Device Register Constant Index

X Y R S T. C. XWYWRWSW T C D I J K

AData table √√√√√√√

BInverter No. √√√√√√√

CRS-485 port √√√√√√

Parameters

Data table designation Parameter and status RS-485 port designation

ARegister type code BInverter number CFixed to H0030

A+1 Leading address B+1 Operation mode C+1 Fixed to 0

B+2 Execution status

B+3 Communication error code

B+4 Inverter communication

B+5 status map

B+6 (each bit shows each

B+7 Inverter status)

Data table designation (A, A+1):

RW register H0003 0 to 255

D register H0004 0 to 4095

6F3B0253

246 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Operation mode designation (B+1):

B+1 Operation mode Description

0 Data exchange mode

(Mode 0) Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Control & Monitor)

(Inverter command: P+FA01&FA00 and R+FD00&FE07)

1 Monitor mode

(Mode 1) Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Monitor only)

(Inverter command: R+FD00&FE07)

2 Read command mode

(Mode 2) Sends a read command to a specified Inverter

(Inverter command: R+ User designation)

3 Write command mode

(Mode 3) Sends a write command to a specified Inverter

(Inverter command: P+ User designation)

4 Broadcast mode

(Mode 4) Sends a write command to all the connected Inverters as broadcast

(Inverter command: P+ User designation)

Inverter number (B):

For the operation mode 0 and 1:

It specifies the maximum Inverter number. For example, if it is 5, the T1-16S scans from #0

through #5 Inverters and repeats. Setting range is 0 to 63.

For the operation mode 2 and 3:

It specifies the target Inverter number for sending commands. Setting range is 0 to 63.

For the operation mode 4:

This setting is ignored. The broadcast address (HFF) is used as Inverter number.

Execution status (B+2):

FEDCBA9876543210

B+2

Communication error code (B+3):

The communication error code responded from the Inverter is shown here. If 2 or more Inverters are error,

the smallest Inverter number's error is stored. Refer to Inverter's manual for the error code.

B+3 Meaning

0 No error (Normal)

Response time-out (No answer)

Others Inverter error response (Refer to Inverter's manual)

Inverter communication status map (B+4 to B+7):

This 4-word table shows the communication status map of each Inverter. (1: Normal / 0: Error or No

answer)

FEDCBA9876543210

B+4 1514131211109876543210

B+5 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

B+6 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32

B+7 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48

Shows the scan count.

(0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 32767 → 0 → 1 ... )

Comes 1 when the RS-485 port is busy. (No execution)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 247

7. Instructions

< Data exchange mode (Mode 0) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 0, the Data exchange mode

(mode 0) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following commands to the Inverters

starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

#0 Frequency reference write (FA01)

#0 Operation command write (FA00)

#1 Frequency reference write (FA01)

#1 Operation command write (FA00)

#n Frequency reference write (FA01)

#n Operation command write (FA00)

#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the

response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port

D1000 4 RW200 5 D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1001 2000 RW201 0 (mode 0) D1011 0 (fixed)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•RW200=5 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters.

•D1000=4 & D1001=2000 ⇒ D2000 is specified as the data table starting address.

Scan

6F3B0253

248 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Data table:

D2000 #0 Operating frequency ← Read

D2001 #0 Output terminal status ← Read

D2002 #0 Frequency reference → Write

D2003 #0 Operation command → Write

D2004 #1 Operating frequency ← Read

D2005 #1 Output terminal status ← Read

D2006 #1 Frequency reference → Write

D2007 #1 Operation command → Write

D2020 #5 Operating frequency ← Read

D2021 #5 Output terminal status ← Read

D2022 #5 Frequency reference → Write

D2023 #5 Operation command → Write

•The data format for the operating frequency and the frequency reference registers are 0.01 Hz units.

For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000.

•For the data format of the output terminal status register, refer to the Monitor mode (mode 1).

•The bit assignment of the operation command register is as follows. For details, refer to your

Inverter manual.

FEDCBA9876543210

Programmed speed selection

0000 = None

0001 = Speed 1

0010 = Speed 2

1111 = Speed 15

PI operation (0 = Normal / 1 = Off)

DC braking (0 = Off / 1 = On)

Jog operation (0 = off / 1 = On)

F/R selection (0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse)

Run/Stop (0 = Stop / 1 = Run)

Free run (0 = Normal / 1 = Free run)

Emergency stop (0 = Normal / 1 = EMS)

Reset command (0 = Normal / 1 = Reset)

Frequency enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)

Command enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)

Example operation:

To operate the #0 Inverter at 30 Hz forward rotation, write the value 3000 in D2002 and HC400 in

D2003. (HC400 = Bits F, E, A are 1, and others are 0)

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in D2000

and D2001 respectively.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 249

7. Instructions

< Monitor mode (Mode 1) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 1, the Monitor mode (mode 1) is

selected.

In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following Read commands to the Inverters starting from #0

through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.

#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)

#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)

The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The monitor data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the

response from the Inverter currently communicating.

Example

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port

D1000 3 RW200 19 D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1001 100 RW201 1 (mode 1) D1011 0 (fixed)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

•RW200=19 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 19. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #19 Inverters.

•D1000=3 & D1001=100 ⇒ RW100 is specified as the data table starting address.

Scan

6F3B0253

250 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

Data table:

RW100 #0 Operating frequency ← Read

RW101 #0 Output terminal status ← Read

RW102 No use

RW103 No use

RW104 #1 Operating frequency ← Read

RW105 #1 Output terminal status ← Read

RW106 No use

RW107 No use

RW176 #19 Operating frequency ← Read

RW177 #19 Output terminal status ← Read

RW178 No use

RW179 No use

•The data format for the operating frequency register is 0.01 Hz units. For example, if it is 60 Hz, the

corresponding register data is 6000.

•The bit assignment of the output terminal status register is as follows. For details, refer to your

Inverter manual.

FEDCBA9876543210

OUT1 (f130)

OUT2 (f131)

FL (f132)

R1 (f133)

R2 (f134)

OUT3 (f135)

OUT4 (f136)

ALM0

ALM1

ALM2

ALM3

Example operation:

The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in RW100

and RW101 respectively.

If the #0 Inverter is operating at 55 Hz, the data 5500 is stored in RW100. If the OUT2 terminal of the

#0 Inverter is ON, the bit 1 of RW101 (R1011) becomes 1.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 251

7. Instructions

< Read command mode (Mode 2) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 2, the Read command mode

(mode 2) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Read command to the

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Sends the specified command to #n Inverter

Receives the response and stores the data into the register

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command setting register and the response data storing register is indirectly specified by

the operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the

response from the Inverter.

Example

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port

D1000 4 RW200 3 D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1001 3000 RW201 2 (mode 2) D1011 0 (fixed)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

• RW200=3 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 3. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #3 Inverter.

• D1000=4 & D1001=3000 ⇒ D3000 is specified as the command setting register and D3001 is specified

as the response data storing register.

Data table:

D3000 Command code

D3001 Response data ← Read

Example operation:

For example, to read the output current from the #3 Inverter, set the command code HFE03 into

D3000. Then the response data is stored in D3001. If the response data is 1915, it means 19.15 %.

For the command code and the data format of the response, refer to your Inverter manual.

Repeat

6F3B0253

252 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

< Write command mode (Mode 3) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 3, the Write command mode

(mode 3) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to the

Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.

Sends the specified command with command data to #n Inverter

Checks the acknowledge

The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7.

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the

operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the

response from the Inverter.

Example

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port

D1000 4 RW200 5 D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1001 3010 RW201 3 (mode 3) D1011 0 (fixed)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

• RW200=5 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #5 Inverter.

• D1000=4 & D1001=3010 ⇒ D3010 is specified as the command code setting register and D3011 is

specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:

D3010 Command code

D3011 Command data → Write

Example operation:

For example, to write the acceleration time parameter (10 seconds) to the #5 Inverter, set the

command code H0009 into D3010 and the value 100 into D3011.

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

Repeat

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 253

7. Instructions

< Broadcast mode (Mode 4) >

When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 4, the Broadcast mode (mode 4)

is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to all the

Inverters as broadcast.

This mode is useful to send Run/Stop command to all the Inverter at the same time.

Sends the specified command with command data to all Inverters (broadcast)

Checks the acknowledge from #0 Inverter

The Inverter number specified by the operand B is ignored.

The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand

B+2 to B+7. (only #0 Inverter responds)

The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the

operand A and A+1.

When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the

response from the Inverter.

Example

Data table designation Parameter & status RS-485 port

D1000 4 RW200 (any 0 to 63) D1010 H0030 (fixed)

D1001 3020 RW201 4 (mode 4) D1011 0 (fixed)

RW202 Execution status

RW203 Comm error code

RW204

RW205 Inverter comms

RW206 status map

RW207

When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.

• D1000=4 & D1001=3020 ⇒ D3020 is specified as the command code setting register and D3021 is

specified as the command data setting register.

Data table:

D3020 Command code

D3021 Command data → Write

Example operation:

For example, to send the Run forward command to all the Inverters, set the command code HFA00

into D3020 and the value HC400 into D3021.

For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.

Repeat

6F3B0253

254 T1-16S User’s Manual

7. Instructions

< Note >

(1) The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error

flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by

user program.

• The RS-485 port designation is other than H0030 and 0.

• The Inverter number designation is other than 0 to 63.

• Operation mode setting for RS-485 port is other than the Inverter connection mode.

(2) This XFER instruction must be programmed in the Main program.

(3) During the instruction input is ON, the data contents in the data table specified by A can be changed.

However, parameters specified by B cannot be changed.

(4) In the Data exchange mode (mode 0) and the Monitor mode (mode 1), the T1-16S scans from #0 to the

specified number. Therefore the Inverter number should be consecutive starting with 0.

If an Inverter is disconnected from the network, the T1-16S checks its existence periodically. When you

turn off power to an Inverter for maintenance purpose and turn on again, it is recommended to reset the

instruction input to re-configure the network.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 255

Section 8

Special I/O Functions

8.1 Special I/O function overview, 256

8.2 Variable input filter constant, 260

8.3 High speed counter, 261

8.4 Interrupt input function, 268

8.5 Analog setting function, 270

8.6 Pulse output function, 271

8.7 PWM output function, 273

6F3B0253

256 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

8.1 Special I/O function overview

The T1-16S supports the special I/O functions as listed below.

Function name Function summary Remarks

Variable input filter

constant Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set

by user program. The setting range is 0 to 15ms

(1ms units). Default value is 10ms. This function is

applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block).

SW16 setting

is necessary to

use this

function. (Note)

Single phase

up-counter Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse

train. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The

countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel.

Channel 1 … X000 count input, X002 reset input

Channel 2 … X001 count input, X003 reset input

Single phase

speed-

counter

Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling

time. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000ms

(10ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available.

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each

channel.

Channel 1 … X000 count input

Channel 2 … X001 count input

High

speed

counter

Quadrature

bi-pulse

counter

Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted

90° each other. Counts up when phase A precedes,

and counts down when phase B precedes.

The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz.

Phase A …X000

Phase B …X001

Reset …… X002

Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt

program when the interrupt input is changed from

OFF to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input

are available.

X002 …Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3)

X003 …Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4)

Only one

among these 4

functions can

be selected.

SW16 is used

to select the

function.(Note)

Analog setting

function The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted

into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW

V0 … SW30

V1 … SW31

No function

selection is

required.

Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The

available pulse rate is 50 to 5000Hz (1Hz units).

Y020 … CW or Pulse (PLS)

Y021 … CCW or Direction (DIR)

PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The

available ON duty setting is 0 to 100% (1% units).

Y020 … PWM output

Either one

between these

2 functions

can be used.

SW26 is used

to select the

function.(Note)

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 257

8. Special I/O Functions

Mode setting for the special I/O functions

These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into

SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for

the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the

special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan.

Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the

interrupt input functions respectively.

FEDCBA9876543210

SW16 0 0 0 0 0

Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection >

0: INT

1: HSC

Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode >

00: No use (Reserve)

01: Rising (OFF to ON)

10: Falling (ON to OFF)

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits A and B < HSC mode >

00: Single phase up-counter

01: Single phase speed-counter

10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter

11: No use (Reserve)

Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT >

00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable

01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable

10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable

11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable

Bit F < Variable input filter constant >

0: No use (fixed to 10ms)

1: Use

6F3B0253

258 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function.

FEDCBA9876543210

SW26 0000000000

Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag >

0: No use

1: Use

Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection >

0: PWM

1: P-OUT

Bit 2 < PLS mode >

0: CW/CCW

1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR)

P-OUT / PWM operation error flag

(These are not user setting items)

Bit D < PWM pulse width error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

Bit F < Frequency setting error >

0: Normal

1: Error

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 259

8. Special I/O Functions

The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table,

‘−’ means do not care.

Variable input filter constant SW16

FEDCBA9876543210

Use 1 0 −−−−00−−00−−−−

High speed counter SW16

FEDCBA9876543210

Single phase Channel 1 only −001000000000011

up-counter Channel 2 only −010000000000011

Both channels −011000000000011

Single phase Channel 1 only −001010000000011

speed-counter Channel 2 only −010010000000011

Both channels −011010000000011

Quadrature bi-pulse counter −000100000000011

Interrupt input function SW16

FEDCBA9876543210

Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON) −001000000000101

Falling (ON to OFF) −001000000001001

Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON) −010000001000001

Falling (ON to OFF) −010000010000001

Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising −011000001000101

1 and 2 No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling −011000010000101

No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising −011000001001001

No.1 = Falling, No.2 =

Falling −011000010001001

Pulse output function SW26

FEDCBA9876543210

CW/CCW method −−−0000000000011

Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method −−−0000000000111

PWM output function SW26

FEDCBA9876543210

Use −−−0000000000001

For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse

counter.

(H0803)

6F3B0253

260 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

8.2 Variable input filter constant

Function

The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007

can be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15ms. The default is 10ms.

The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after

the second scan.

Related registers

SW16 Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

SW17 Input filter constant value

FEDCBA9876543210

No use (set to 0)

Setting value

0 to 15

Operation

Input signal

Internal logic

Scan cycle

X device

T: Input filter constant (0 to 15ms)

Sample program

This program sets the input filter constant to 3ms.

TTTT

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 261

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3 High speed counter

8.3.1 Single phase up-counter

Function

When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1.

When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O

interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is

reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF.

The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into

the set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON.

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)

Reset input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function Register/device Remarks

Channel 1 Channel 2

Count input X000 X001 (Note)

Reset input X002 X003

Set value SW18 SW20 Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Count value SW22 SW23

Soft-gate S240 S248 Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt enable S241 S249 Interrupt is enabled when ON

Count preset S243 S24B Used to preset the counter value

Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused

channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

Channel 1 … I/O interrupt program #1

Channel 2 … I/O interrupt program #2

6F3B0253

262 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Reset input

Soft-gate

Count value

Interrupt

Sample program

(H1003)

In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase up-

counter (channel 1 only) is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to

ON to enable the counter operation.

The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored

in SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of

D0100.

Set value

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 263

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter

Function

This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during

the every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the

hold value register.

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is

OFF, the hold value is cleared to 0.

The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000ms (10ms units).

The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit).

Hardware condition

Count input (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function Register/device Remarks

Channel 1 Channel 2

Count input X000 X001 (Note 2)

Sampling time SW18 SW20 Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1)

Hold value SW22 SW23 Data range: H0000 to HFFFF

Soft-gate S240 S248 Operation is enabled when ON

Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10ms multiplier)

Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal

input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused

channel can be used as normal input devices.

Interrupt assignment

No interrupt function.

6F3B0253

264 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Count input

Sampling time

Soft-gate

Internal

count value

Hold value

Sample program

(H1403)

In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speed-

counter (channel 1 only) is selected.

The sampling time is set as 100ms, because 10 is written in SW18.

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works.

The hold value is stored in SW22.

∆T∆T∆T∆T∆T∆T

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 265

8. Special I/O Functions

8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter

Function

This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose

phases are shifted 90° each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts

down when phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are

counted. Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained.

Phase A

Phase B

Up count Down count

When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt

program #1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON).

This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to

0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0

when the reset input comes ON.

When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into

the comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON.

The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON.

The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data).

Hardware condition

Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)

Reset input (X002)

ON/OFF duration: 2ms or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function Register/device Remarks

Phase A X000

Phase B X001

Reset input X002

Comparison value 1 SW19⋅SW18 Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647

Comparison value 2 SW21⋅SW20

Count value SW23⋅SW22

Soft-gate S240 Operation is enabled when ON

Interrupt enable 1 S241 Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON

Count preset 1 S243 Used to preset the count value

Interrupt enable 2 S249 Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON

Count preset 2 S24B Used to preset the count value

6F3B0253

266 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Interrupt assignment

Comparison value 1 … I/O interrupt program #1

Comparison value 2 … I/O interrupt program #2

Operation

Up count

Down count

Reset input

Soft-gate

Count value

Interrupt

2147483647

Comparison

value 1

Comparison

value 2

-2147483648

2111

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 267

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

(H0803)

In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse

counter is selected.

When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register

(SW19⋅SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21⋅SW20).

While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the

interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation.

The count value is stored in SW23⋅SW22.

When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of

D0101⋅D0100.

6F3B0253

268 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

8.4 Interrupt input function

Function

When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to

OFF), the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately.

Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be

selected either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input.

The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O

interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2.

Hardware condition

Interrupt input (X002 and X003)

ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more

Related registers

SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Interrupt input 1 X002

Interrupt input 2 X003

Interrupt assignment

Interrupt input 1 … I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt input 2 … I/O interrupt program #4

Operation

Interrupt input 1

Interrupt input 2

Interrupt

The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs.

4433

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 269

8. Special I/O Functions

Sample program

Main program

(H3045)

I/O interrupt program #3

Interrupt program A

I/O interrupt program #4

Interrupt program B

In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function

(2 points, rising for both) is selected.

When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When

X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed.

Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the

corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because

the interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states.

NOTE

6F3B0253

270 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

8.5 Analog setting function

Function

The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000)

and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1)

The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function

instructions.

Related registers

Function Register Remarks

Adjuster V0 SW30 Data range: 0 to 1000

Adjuster V1 SW31

Operation

V0 V1

SW30 (0 to 1000) SW31 (0 to 1000)

Sample program

The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF

interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0.

Decrease Increase Decrease Increase

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 271

8. Special I/O Functions

8.6 Pulse output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse

frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).

The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR).

In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50

to 5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000),

and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000).

< CW/CCW mode > CW

CCW

< PLS/DIR mode > PLS

DIR

In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While

the pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the

frequency setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency

setting) cannot be changed when the pulse enable flag is ON.

This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc.

Related registers

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function Register/ Remarks

CW/CCW PLS/DIR device

CW pulse PLS Y020

CCW pulse DIR Y021

Pulse enable flag S270 Output is enabled when ON

Frequency setting register SW28 Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000

Frequency setting error flag S26F ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and

50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the

pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes

ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting)

6F3B0253

272 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

Frequency setting

Frequency

Pulse output

Sample program

In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse

output function is selected.

When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by

D0100.

If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes

ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped.

-300-1000

3001000

100 -100

1KHz 300Hz

100Hz

300Hz

100Hz

1KHz

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 273

8. Special I/O Functions

8.7 PWM output function

Function

This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty

cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).

ON duty 50% 70% 60%

PWM

T T T T = Pulse cycle

The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable

flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting

value (0 to 100).

The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before

turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the

pulse enable is ON.

Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100 µs. Therefore, the controllable

ON duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty

setting value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON.

(PWM output operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed)

Frequency Cycle time Available ON duty

50 - 100 Hz 20 - 10 ms 0 to 100 %

200 Hz 5 ms 0, 2 to 98, 100 %

1000 Hz 1 ms 0, 10 to 90, 100 %

5000 Hz 200 µs0, 50, 100 %

Related registers

SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.

Function Register/

device Remarks

PWM pulse Y020

Pulse enable flag S270 Output is enabled when ON

Frequency setting register SW28 Data range: 50 to 5000

ON duty setting register SW29 Data range: 0 to 100

Pulse width error flag S26D ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

ON duty setting error flag S26E ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Frequency setting error flag S26F ON at error (reset OFF automatically)

Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the

frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E)

comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting)

6F3B0253

274 T1-16S User’s Manual

8. Special I/O Functions

Operation

Pulse enable

ON duty setting

ON duty

PWM output

Sample program

In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz

PWM output function is selected.

When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by

D0200.

If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON

and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped.

6070

302010

70%

60%

70%

30%

20%

10%

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 275

Section 9

Maintenance and Checks

9.1 Precautions during operation, 276

9.2 Daily checks, 277

9.3 Periodic checks, 278

9.4 Maintenance parts, 279

9.5 Battery, 280

6F3B0253

276 T1-16S User’s Manual

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.1 Precautions during operation

When the T1-16S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items.

(1) The programmer cable can be plugged or unplugged while the T1-16S is in

operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause

malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.

(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause

damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1-16S owing

to static electricity, do not touch the cable ends.

(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1-16S is in operation, even if the terminals

are not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static

electricity.

(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1-16S is in operation. This

may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.

Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used.

(5) Turn off power when a battery installs and removes.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 277

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.2 Daily checks

To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily

basis.

Item Check Corrective measures

PWR

(power) Lit when internal 5V is

normal.

RUN Lit when operating

normally.

Status LEDs

FLT (fault) Not lit when operating

normally.

If the LEDs are not normal, see

10. Troubleshooting.

Mode control

switch Check that the mode control switch is

in R (RUN) side. Normal operation is

performed when this switch is in R

(RUN) side.

Turn this switch to R (RUN) side.

Input LEDs Lit when the corresponding input is

ON. • Check that the input terminal

screw is not loose.

• Check that the input terminal

block is not loose.

• Check that the input voltage is

within the specified range.

Output LEDs Lit when the output is ON and the

corresponding load should operate. • Check that the output terminal

screw is not loose.

• Check that the output terminal

block is not loose.

• Check that the output voltage

is within the specified range.

!CAUTION 1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk

of electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is

emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire

or electrical shock.

6F3B0253

278 T1-16S User’s Manual

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.3 Periodic checks

Check the T1-16S based on the following items every six months. Also perform

checks when the operating environment is changed.

Item Check Criteria

Measure the power voltage at the T1-

16S’s power terminals. 85 - 132/170 - 264Vac (AC PS)

20.4 - 28.8Vdc (DC PS)

Check that the terminal screw is not

loose. Not loose

Power supply

Check that the power cable is not

damaged. Not damaged

Check that the unit is installed

securely. Not loose, no play

Check that the I/O module is inserted

securely. (if any) Not loose, no play

Check that the expansion rack/unit is

installed securely. (if any) Not loose, no play

Check that the expansion cable is

connected securely and the cable is

not damaged. (if any)

Not loose, not damaged

Installation

condition

Check that the I/O module on the

expansion rack is inserted securely. (if

any)

Not loose, no play

Measure the input/output voltage at

the T1-16S’s terminals. The voltage must be within the

specified range.

Check the input status LEDs. The LED must light normally.

Check the output status LEDs. The LED must light normally.

Check that the terminal block is

installed securely. Not loose, no play

Check that the terminal screw is not

loose and the terminal has a sufficient

distance to the next terminal.

Not loose, not contacting the

next terminal

Input/output

Check that the each I/O wire is not

damaged. Not damaged

!CAUTION 1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk

of electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is

emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire

or electrical shock.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 279

9. Maintenance and Checks

(Periodic checks - continued)

Item Check Criteria

Environment Check that the temperature, humidity,

vibration, dust, etc. are within the

specified range.

Must be within the range of

general specification.

Check that the functions of the

programming tool are normal. Monitoring and other operations

are available.

Programming tool

Check that the connector and cable

are not damaged. Not damaged

User program Check that the T1-16S program and

the master program (saved on a floppy

disk, etc.) are the same.

No compare error

9.4 Maintenance parts

To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts.

Item Quantity Remarks

T1-16S basic unit 1 Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time

of the controlled system.

Programming tool 1 Useful for the troubleshooting procedure.

Master program As required Saved on a floppy disk, etc.

Expansion rack or

unit (if any) 1

I/O module

(if any) One of each type

used

Fuse for I/O

module (if any) One of each type

used

Battery (CR2032) 1

These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations.

6F3B0253

280 T1-16S User’s Manual

9. Maintenance and Checks

9.5 Battery

(1) Install

Insert the battery by an angle of 45°.

(Turn + side into an upside.)

(1) Push the battery horizontal direction.

(2) Push from upside and lock.

(2) Eject

Push the center of the tab by a finger or a pen. Then

the battery will be unlocked.

Remove the battery.

1. Turn off power when installing or removing the battery for safety.

2. The battery type is CR2032. Do not use other types of battery. Use of

another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.

3. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not

disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.

NOTE

+ side

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 281

Section 10

Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 282

10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 288

6F3B0253

282 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

10.1 Troubleshooting procedure

If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the

control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try

to determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system.

If the problem is found in the T1-16S, check the following points:

PWR (power) LED Follow the procedure in

10.1.1 Power supply check

Lit

RUN LED Follow the procedure in

10.1.2 CPU check

Lit

User program Follow the procedure in

10.1.3 Program check

Normal operation

Input operation Follow the procedure in

10.1.4 Input check

Normal operation

Output operation Follow the procedure in

10.1.5 Output check

Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem.

!CAUTION 1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of

electrical shock.

2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is

emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire

or electrical shock.

3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal

blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage

to the T1 and related equipment.

4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is

failed. Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for

unauthorized repairing.

Not lit

Not normal

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 283

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.1 Power supply check

If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points.

Check the power connection Connection terminals are correct.

The terminal screws are not loose.

The terminal block is installed securely.

Correct

Check the power voltage 85 to 132/170 to 264Vac (50/60 Hz)

at the T1-16S’s terminal or 20.4 to 28.8Vdc (DC power)

Normal

Remove the programmer If the PWR LED becomes normal, the

port connector internal 5Vdc can be shorted in the

external connections of this port.

Still unlit

Remove the 24Vdc service If the PWR LED becomes normal, the

power terminals if it is used 24Vdc service power can be over load.

Still unlit

Remove the I/O modules. If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1-16S

basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit.

Lit

Confirm the internal 5Vdc The 5Vdc capacity for I/O modules is

current consumption if max. 1.5A.

I/O module is used. (Refer to section 2.1.)

Within the limit

Insert the removed option Replace the faulty I/O module.

modules one by one to

pinpoint the faulty card.

6F3B0253

284 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.2 CPU check

If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points.

Check the position of the If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the

mode control switch switch to R (RUN) position.

Check the FLT (fault) LED If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1-16S

is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error

message by connecting the

programming tool. Refer to section 10.2.

Is the RUN LED blinking ? If it is blinking, the T1-16S is in the HOLD

mode. Check your program

whether the HOLD device (S401) is

not used.

Connect the programming If the T1-16S stays in HALT mode even

tool, and check the T1-16S’s when the mode control switch is changed,

status the switch may be faulty.

If the communication between the T1-16S

and the programming tool is not possible,

the T1-16S may be faulty.

10.1.3 Program check

Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation

does not work as intended.

(1) Whether duplicated coils are not programmed.

(2) Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not

overlapping.

(3) Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the

T1-16S’s scan time.

(4) Whether a register/device, which is used in the main program, is not operated

erroneously in the interrupt program.

When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the

EEPROM write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the

old program stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your

program modification will disappear.

NOTE

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 285

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.4 Input check

If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the

following points:

Is the input status LED If not, check the input voltage at the

changed ON/OFF according T1-16S’s input terminals.

to the corresponding input If the voltage is not normal, check the input

device operation ? device and the cable.

If the voltage is normal, the T1-16S’s input

Yes circuit may be faulty.

Connect the programming If the monitored X device state is identical

tool, and monitor the to the state of the input status LED, the

corresponding X device state cause may lie in the user program or in the

in RUN mode environment.

Not normal

Check whether the X device If it is forced, release the force designation

is forced or not then execute the EEPROM write

operation.

Not forced

Check whether the I/O If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or

allocation table is identical to the input circuit may be faulty.

the actual I/O configuration

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O If it becomes identical, execute the

allocation, and check whether EEPROM write operation.

the I/O allocation table is now

identical to the actual I/O

configuration

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for If so, the card, module or expansion unit

a specific I/O module? may be faulty. For expansion unit, check

the expansion cable also.

6F3B0253

286 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.5 Output check

If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external

output device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points:

Is the output status LED

changed ON/OFF according

No to the program execution ?

Yes

Check the voltage between If it is the circuit voltage at the output is

the output terminal and its ON, or if it is 0V at the output is OFF with

common terminal. the load ON, the T1-16S’s output circuit

It should be 0V when the may be faulty.

output is ON, and it should If it is 0V and the load is also OFF, check

be the circuit voltage when the output power and the output cable

the output is OFF. connections.

Normal If it is not normal, check the output cable

Check the voltage at the load connections.

If it is normal, check the specification of

the load, also check environmental factors.

Check whether the I/O If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or

allocation table is identical to the output circuit may be faulty.

the actual I/O configuration

Not identical

Execute the automatic I/O If it becomes identical, execute the

allocation, and check whether EEPROM write operation.

the I/O allocation table is now

identical to the actual I/O

configuration

Still not identical

Is the allocation mismatch for If so, the card, module or expansion unit

a specific I/O module? may be faulty. For expansion unit, check

the expansion cable also.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 287

10. Troubleshooting

10.1.6 Environmental problem

If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible

environmental factors.

(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices:

The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of

the problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3.

(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding

equipment or high-frequency equipment:

The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge

voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause

the problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system.

Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some

cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation.

(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery:

The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation

status of the units and take necessary measures.

(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced:

Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module.

Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature

is beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed.

6F3B0253

288 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

10.2 Self-diagnostic items

If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1-16S CPU, the error

messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded

in the T1-16S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation

is not possible, the T1-16S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR

mode).

The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history

table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered)

If the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the T1-

16S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is

important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to

display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool.

(An example of the event history)

< Event History>

Date Time Event Count Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 Mode

1. 98-02-21 16:48:01 I/O no answer 3 #00-04 RUN Down

2. 98-02-21 15:55:26 System power on 1 INIT.

3. 98-02-21 12:03:34 System power off 1 RUN

4. 98-01-15 09:27:12 System power on 1 INIT.

5. 98-01-14 19:11:43 System power off 1 HALT

6. 98-01-14 10:39:11 No END/IRET error 3 M-001 H0024 HALT Down

In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded.

Each column shows the following information.

Date: The date when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)

Time: The time when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)

Event: Error message

Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action

Info n: Related information to the error detected

Mode: T1-16S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the

power-up initialization)

Down: Shows the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected

If the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not

accepted.

In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the

HALT mode before starting the correction operation.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 289

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information Special Meaning and countermeasures

Event Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 device

Batt voltage drop S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity

of RAM (back-up area) has been detected.

If retentive registers are used, these validity

are not guaranteed. (No error down)

Boundary error Program

type - Address

in the FUN No. The register of index modification is other

than RW, T, C and D. (Error down)

block No. block S064 The register designated by index

modification has exceeded the allowable

range. That is, out of RW, T, C and D.

(No error down)

Check the value of the index register.

Clock-calendar error S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal.

(No error down)

Set the date and time.

(Enhanced model only)

Duplicate entry No. Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

Entry No. Multiple SUBR instructions which have the

same subroutine number are programmed.

(Error down)

Check the program.

EEPROM BCC error Illegal

BCC S004

S013 BCC error has been detected in the user

program of the EEPROM. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

EEPROM warning Number

of excess

writing

S007 The number of times of writing into

EEPROM has exceeded the life (100,000

times). (No error down)

Replace the unit because the data reliability

of the EEPROM will decrease.

I/O bus error Unit No. Data S005

S020 An abnormality has been detected in I/O

bus checking. (Error down)

Check the expansion cable connection and

I/O module mounting status.

I/O mismatch Unit No. -

slot No. Register

No. S005

S021 The I/O allocation information and the

actual I/O configuration are not identical.

(Error down)

Check the I/O allocation and the I/O module

mounting status.

I/O no answer Unit No. -

slot No. Register

No. S005

S022 No response from the T2 I/O module has

been received. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation, the expansion

cable connection and the T2 I/O module

mounting status.

I/O parity error Unit No. -

slot No. Register

No. S005

S023 I/O bus parity error has been detected in

data read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error

down)

Check the expansion cable connection and

the T2 I/O module mounting status.

Illegal I/O reg Unit No. -

slot No. Register

No. S005

S021 The allocated I/O register address exceeds

the limit, 32 words. (Error down)

Check the I/O allocation.

6F3B0253

290 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information Special Meaning and countermeasures

Event Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 device

Illegal inst Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

S006

S030

S060

An illegal instruction has been detected in

the program. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

Illegal sys intrpt Interrupt

address 1 Interrupt

address 2 Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No

error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the

unit.

Invalid Fun inst Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

Fun No. A function instruction which is not supported

by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

Invalid program Program

type -

block No.

A basic ladder instruction which is not

supported by the T1-16S is programmed.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

SUBR instruction is not programmed before

RET instruction. (Error down)

Correct the program.

An abnormality is detected in the program

management information. (Error down)

Reload the program and execute EEPROM

write operation again.

Loop nesting error Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside

other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down)

Correct the program.

Memory full The program exceeds the executable

memory capacity. (Error down)

Reduce the program steps.

No END/IRET error Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

The END instruction is not programmed in

the main program or in the sub-program.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

The IRET instruction is not programmed in

the interrupt program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

No RET error Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

Sub-r No. The RET instruction is not programmed in

the subroutine program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

No sub-r entry Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

Sub-r No. The subroutine corresponding to CALL

instruction is not programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 291

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information Special Meaning and countermeasures

Event Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 device

Operand error Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

A register/device which is not supported by

the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The timer or counter register is duplicated in

the program. (Error down)

Correct the program.

The subroutine number programmed with

CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the

range. (Error down)

0 to 255

Correct the program.

Index modification is programmed for

instructions in which the index modification

is not allowed. (Error down)

Correct the program.

Pair inst error Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR,

JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error

down)

Correct the program.

A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other

MCS-MCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other

JCS-JCR segment. (Error down )

Correct the program.

Peripheral LSI err Error

code S004

S016 CPU hardware error has been detected in

the power-up initialization. (Error down and

programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

Program BCC error Illegal

BCC S006

S030 BCC error has been detected in the user

program in the RAM. (Error down)

If the error remains after power OFF and

ON again, reload the program and execute

EEPROM write operation.

RAM check error Error

address Error data Test data S004

S012 In the power-up initialization, an error has

detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error

down)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

Scan time over Scan time S006

S031 The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error

down)

Correct the program to reduce the scan time

or use WDT instruction to extend the check

time.

6F3B0253

292 T1-16S User’s Manual

10. Troubleshooting

Error message and related information Special Meaning and countermeasures

Event Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 device

Sys RAM check err Error

address Error data Test data S004

S011 In the power-up initialization, an error has

detected by system RAM read/write

checking. (Error down and programming

tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

Sys ROM BCC error Illegal

BCC S004

S010 BCC error has been detected in the system

program in the ROM. (Error down and

programming tool cannot be connected)

Replace the unit if the error remains after

power OFF and ON again.

System power off Power OFF (no error)

System power on Power ON (no error)

Sub-r nesting err Program

type -

block No.

Address

in the

block

Sub-r No. The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3

levels.

(Error down)

Correct the program.

WD timer error Address 1 Address 2 S004

S01F The watchdog timer error has occurred.

(Error down)

If the error occurs frequently, replace the

unit.

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 293

Appendix

A.1 List of models and types, 294

A.2 Instruction index, 295

6F3B0253

294 T1-16S User’s Manual

Appendix

A.1 List of models and types

• Basic unit

Model Power supply Input type RTC/RS-485 Type code Part number

Yes T1-MDR16SS TDR116S6S100 – 240Vac

No T1-MDR16SC TDR116S6C

Yes T1-MDR16SSD TDR116S3S

T1-16S

24Vdc

No T1-MDR16SCD TDR116S3C

• I/O module

Description Type code Part number

16 points 24Vdc input DI116M TDI116M∗S

16 points 24Vdc output DO116M TDO116M∗S

8 points 24Vdc input and 8 points 24Vdc output DD116M TDD116M∗S

8 points relay output RO108M TRO108M∗S

1 channel analog input, 0 – 5V/0 - 20mA AD121M TAD121M∗S

1 channel analog input, ±10V AD131M TAD131M∗S

1 channel analog output, 0 – 20mA DA121M TDA121M∗S

1 channel analog output, ±10V DA131M TDA131M∗S

1 channel thermo couple input, K/E/J TC111M TTC111M∗S

TOSLINE-F10 remote station FR112M TFR112M∗S

• Peripherals

Description Type code Part number

Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S) HP911A THP911A∗S

T-PDS software (Windows version) T-PDS Windows TMW33E2SS

Program storage module RM102 TRM102∗∗S

Multi-drop adapter for computer link CU111 TCU111∗∗S

• Cable and others

Description Type code Part number

T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length CJ105 TCJ105∗CS

HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts) CJ102 TCJ102∗CS

RS-232C connector for computer link

(with 2 m cable) PT16S TPT16S∗AS

I/O module I/O connector for

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, soldering type PT15S TPT15S∗AS

I/O module I/O connector for

DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, flat cable type PT15F TPT15F∗AS

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 295

Appendix

A.2 Instruction index

• Instruction name

1 bit rotate left 173 Exclusive OR 158

1 bit rotate right 172 Expanded data transfer 241

1 bit shift left 165 Flip-flop 215

1 bit shift right 164 FOR 205

2’s complement 232 Forced coil 122

7-segment decode 234 Function generator 229

Absolute value 231 Greater than 178

Addition 143 Greater than or equal 179

Addition with carry 149 Hex to ASCII conversion 161

AND 156 Increment 154

ASCII conversion 236 Interrupt return 210

ASCII to Hex conversion 162 Invert coil 124

Average value 228 Invert transfer 138

BCD conversion 238 Inverter 123

Bi-directional shift register 170 Jump control reset 134

Binary conversion 237 Jump control set 134

Bit count 202 Less than 182

Bit test 163 Less than or equal 183

Calendar operation 218 Lower limit 225

Coil 121 Master control reset 133

Counter 132 Master control set 133

Data exchange 139 Maximum value 226

Data transfer 136 Minimum value 227

Decode 201 Moving average 159

Decrement 155 Multiplexer 176

Demultiplexer 177 Multiplication 145

Device/register reset 197 n bit rotate left 175

Device/register set 196 n bit rotate right 174

Digital filter 160 n bit shift left 167

Direct I/O 239 n bit shift right 166

Disable interrupt 209 NC contact 118

Division 146 Negative pulse coil 128

Double-word 2’s complement 233 Negative pulse contact 126

Double-word addition 147 NEXT 206

Double-word data transfer 137 NO contact 117

Double-word equal 286 Not equal 181

Double-word greater than 284 OFF delay timer 130

Double-word greater than or equal 285 ON delay timer 129

Double-word less than 288 OR 157

Double-word less than or equal 289 Positive pulse coil 127

Double-word not equal 287 Positive pulse contact 125

Double-word subtraction 148 Pre-derivative real PID 219

Enable interrupt 208 Reset carry 199

Encode 200 Set calendar 217

End 135 Set carry 198

Equal 180 Shift register 168

6F3B0253

296 T1-16S User’s Manual

Appendix

Single shot timer 131

Special module data read 245

Special module data write 247

Step sequence initialize 212

Step sequence input 213

Step sequence output 214

Subroutine call 203

Subroutine entry 207

Subroutine return 204

Subtraction 144

Subtraction with carry 150

Table initialize 140

Table invert transfer 142

Table transfer 141

Transitional contact (falling) 120

Transitional contact (rising) 119

Unsigned division 152

Unsigned double/single division 153

Unsigned equal 192

Unsigned greater than 190

Unsigned greater than or equal 191

Unsigned less than 194

Unsigned less than or equal 195

Unsigned multiplication 151

Unsigned not equal 193

Up-down counter 216

Upper limit 224

Watchdog timer reset 211

6F3B0253

Basic Hardware and Function 297

Appendix

• Instruction symbol

∗145 FG 229 U/D 216

+ 143 FOR 205 U< 194

+1 154 HTOA 161 U<= 195

+C 149 I/O 239 U<> 193

- 144 IRET 210 U= 192

-1 155 JCR 134 U> 190

-C 150 JCS 134 U>= 191

/ 146 LL 225 UL 224

< 182 MAVE 159 WDT 211

<= 183 MAX 226 WRITE 247

<> 181 MCR 133 XCHG 139

= 180 MCS 133 XFER 241

> 178 MIN 227

>= 179 MOV 136

7SEG 234 MPX 176

ABS 231 NEG 232

AND 156 NEXT 206

ASC 236 NOT 138

ATOH 162 OR 157

AVE 228 PID3 219

BC 202 READ 245

BCD 238 RET 204

BIN 237 RST 197

CALL 203 RSTC 199

CLDN 217 RTL 175

CLDS 218 RTL1 173

CNT 132 RTR 174

D+ 147 RTR1 172

D- 148 SET 196

D< 188 SETC 198

D<= 189 SHL 167

D<> 187 SHL1 165

D= 186 SHR 166

D> 184 SHR1 164

D>= 185 SR 168

DEC 201 SS 131

DFL 160 STIN 213

DI 209 STIZ 212

DIV 153 STOT 214

DMOV 137 SUBR 207

DNEG 233 TEST 163

DPX 177 TINZ 140

DSR 170 TMOV 141

EI 208 TNOT 142

ENC 200 TOF 130

END 135 TON 129

EOR 158 U∗151

F/F 215 U/ 152

6F3B0253

298 T1-16S User’s Manual

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

Industrial Equipment Department

1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-ku

Tokyo 105-8001, JAPAN

Tel: 03-3457-4900 Fax: 03-5444-9268

Toshiba 6F3B0253 Users Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation